SLK

Operator's Manual
SLK Operator's Manual

É17258445008ËÍ
1725844500

Order no. 6515 3334 13 Part no. 172 584 45 00 Edition A 2015
Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details
Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet
RBluetooth® X Several of these symbols in succes-
is a registered trademark of
sion indicate an instruction with sev- Further information about Mercedes-Benz
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
instruction that is continued on the only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the
Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Editorial office
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade- play.
marks of Apple Inc. ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har- tected by copyright © 2005 or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
man International Industries. The FreeType Project without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg- http://www.freetype.org. All rights
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- reserved.
Vehicle manufacturer
tion.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
Daimler AG
XM Radio Inc.
Mercedesstraße 137
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
70327 Stuttgart
uity Digital Corporation.
Germany
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you. As at 24.09.2013
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company

1725844500 É17258445008ËÍ
 Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 71

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Climate control ................................. 121

Driving and parking .......................... 137

On-board computer and displays .... 193

Stowage and features ...................... 255

Maintenance and care ...................... 277

Breakdown assistance ..................... 291

Wheels and tires ............................... 309

Technical data ................................... 345

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the blower output of the

AIRSCARF vents ............................. 135
12 V socket Setting the center air vents ........... 134
see Sockets Setting the side air vents ............... 135
Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100
A Alarm
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69
Display message ............................ 213 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 69
Function/notes ................................ 61 Switching the function on/off
Important safety notes .................... 61 (ATA) ................................................ 69
Warning lamp ................................. 245 Alarm system
Accident see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Automatic measures after an acci- Ambient lighting
dent ................................................. 57 Setting the brightness (on-board
Activating/deactivating cooling computer) ...................................... 205
with air dehumidification ................. 127 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 208
Active light function ......................... 112 Anti-lock braking system
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Anti-Theft Alarm system
Display message ............................ 228 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function/notes ............................. 112 Ashtray ............................................... 260
Switching on/off ........................... 113 Assistance display (on-board com-
Additional speedometer ................... 205 puter) .................................................. 203
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 350 Assistance menu (on-board com-
Air bags puter) .................................................. 203
Deployment ..................................... 54 ASSYST PLUS
Display message ............................ 224 Displaying a service message ........ 283
Front air bag (driver, front Hiding a service message .............. 282
passenger) ....................................... 47 Resetting the service interval dis-
Head bag ......................................... 48 play ................................................ 283
Important safety notes .................... 46 Service message ............................ 282
Introduction ..................................... 46 Special service requirements ......... 283
Knee bag .......................................... 47 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- Activating/deactivating ................... 69
tor lamp ........................................... 41 Function ........................................... 69
Side impact air bag .......................... 48 Switching off the alarm .................... 69
Air-conditioning system ATTENTION ASSIST
see Climate control Activating/deactivating ................. 203
AIRGUIDE ............................................. 91 Display message ............................ 231
AIRSCARF Function/notes ............................. 188
Problem (malfunction) ................... 100 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Switching on/off ........................... 100 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 200
AIRSCARF vents Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Setting the blower output .............. 135 see Qualified specialist workshop
Air vents Authorized workshop
Important safety notes .................. 134 see Qualified specialist workshop
Setting ........................................... 134
 Index 5

AUTO lights Jump starting ................................. 301

Display message ............................ 228 Overview ........................................ 297
see Lights Belt
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ see Seat belts
stop function) .................................... 146 Blind Spot Assist
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Activating/deactivating ................. 204
start/stop function) .......................... 144 Display message ............................ 232
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109 Notes/function .............................. 189
Automatic transmission Brake Assist
Accelerator pedal position ............. 152 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Automatic drive program ............... 154 Brake fluid
Changing gear ............................... 152 Display message ............................ 220
Display message ............................ 238 Notes ............................................. 350
Driving tips .................................... 152 Brake force distribution, elec-
Emergency running mode .............. 158 tronic
Kickdown ....................................... 153 see EBD (electronic brake force
Manual drive program .................... 154 distribution)
Manual drive program (vehicles Brake lamps
with Sports package AMG) ............ 155 Display message ............................ 226
Overview ........................................ 151 Brakes
Problem (malfunction) ................... 158 ABS .................................................. 61
Program selector button ................ 153 BAS .................................................. 62
Pulling away ................................... 142 BAS PLUS ........................................ 62
Releasing the parking lock man- Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350
ually ............................................... 158 Display message ............................ 213
Selector lever ................................ 151 EBD .................................................. 67
Starting the engine ........................ 142 High-performance brake system .... 168
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 154 Important safety notes .................. 166
Transmission position display ........ 151 Maintenance .................................. 167
Transmission positions .................. 152 Parking brake ................................ 162
Automatic transmission emer- Riding tips ...................................... 166
gency mode ....................................... 158 Warning lamp ................................. 245
Breakdown
B see Flat tire
see Towing away
Backup lamp
Brightness control (instrument
Changing bulbs .............................. 117
cluster lighting) ................................... 31
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62
Bulbs
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
see Replacing bulbs
PLUS) .................................................... 62
Battery (SmartKey)
C
Checking .......................................... 75
Important safety notes .................... 74 California
Replacing ......................................... 75 Important notice for retail cus-
Battery (vehicle) tomers and lessees .......................... 23
Charging ........................................ 299 Calling up a malfunction
Display message ............................ 229 see Display messages
Important safety notes .................. 297
6 Index

Car Child seat

see Vehicle Forward-facing restraint system ...... 60
Care On the front-passenger seat ............ 60
Carpets .......................................... 289 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60
Car wash ........................................ 284 Cigarette lighter ................................ 260
Display ........................................... 288 Cleaning
Exhaust pipe .................................. 287 Mirror turn signal ........................... 287
Exterior lights ................................ 287 Climate control
Gear or selector lever .................... 288 Air-conditioning system ................. 123
Interior ........................................... 288 Automatic climate control (dual-
Matte finish ................................... 286 zone) .............................................. 125
Notes ............................................. 283 Controlling automatically ............... 129
Paint .............................................. 285 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127
Plastic trim .................................... 288 Defrosting the windows ................. 131
Power washer ................................ 285 Defrosting the windshield .............. 131
Roof lining ...................................... 289 General notes ................................ 122
Seat belt ........................................ 289 Indicator lamp ................................ 129
Seat cover ..................................... 289 Information about using auto-
Sensors ......................................... 287 matic climate control ..................... 126
Steering wheel ............................... 288 Maximum cooling .......................... 131
Trim pieces .................................... 288 Notes on using the air-condition-
Washing by hand ........................... 284 ing system ..................................... 124
Wheels ........................................... 286 Overview of systems ...................... 122
Windows ........................................ 286 Problems with cooling with air
Wiper blades .................................. 286 dehumidification ............................ 129
Wooden trim .................................. 288 Problem with the rear window
Car key defroster ........................................ 133
see SmartKey Refrigerant ..................................... 352
Car wash (care) ................................. 284 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 353
CD player/CD changer (on-board Setting the air distribution ............. 130
computer) .......................................... 201 Setting the airflow ......................... 130
Center console Setting the air vents ...................... 134
Lower section .................................. 35 Setting the temperature ................ 129
Upper section .................................. 34 Switching air-recirculation mode
Central locking on/off ............................................ 133
Automatic locking (on-board com- Switching on/off ........................... 127
puter) ............................................. 207 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 72 Switching the rear window
Changing bulbs defroster on/off ............................ 132
High-beam headlamps ................... 116 Switching the ZONE function on/
Low-beam headlamps .................... 116 off .................................................. 130
Reversing lamps ............................ 117 Cockpit
Side marker lamps (rear) ............... 116 Overview .......................................... 30
Turn signals (front) ......................... 116 see Instrument cluster
Children Collapsible spare wheel
Restraint systems ............................ 59 Inflating ......................................... 342
Special seat belt retractor ............... 58 see Emergency spare wheel
 Index 7

COMAND display D
Cleaning ......................................... 288
Combination switch .......................... 110 Dashboard
Compass see Instrument cluster
Data
Calibrating ..................................... 274
Calling up ....................................... 273 see Technical data
Setting ........................................... 274 Daytime running lamps
Consumption statistics (on-board Display message ............................ 227
computer) .......................................... 197 Function/notes ............................. 109
Convenience closing feature .............. 85 Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 205
Convenience opening feature
Declarations of conformity ................. 25
see Side windows
Delayed switch-off
Coolant (engine)
Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Checking the level ......................... 281
puter) ............................................. 206
Display message ............................ 228
Interior lighting .............................. 206
Filling capacity ............................... 351
Diagnostics connection ...................... 25
Important safety notes .................. 351
Temperature (on-board com- Digital speedometer ......................... 198
puter) ............................................. 208 Display messages
Temperature gauge ........................ 194 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 282
Warning lamp ................................. 251 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 212
Cooling Driving systems ............................. 231
see Climate control Engine ............................................ 228
Copyright ............................................. 28 General notes ................................ 212
Cornering light function Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 212
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 242
Display message ............................ 225
Lights ............................................. 225
Function/notes ............................. 111
Crash-responsive emergency light- Safety systems .............................. 213
SmartKey ....................................... 242
ing ....................................................... 114
Tires ............................................... 236
Cruise control
Vehicle ........................................... 238
Cruise control lever ....................... 170
Distance recorder
Deactivating ................................... 171
see Trip odometer
Display message ............................ 235
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 253
Driving system ............................... 169
DISTRONIC PLUS
Function/notes ............................. 169
Important safety notes .................. 169 Cruise control lever ....................... 173
Setting a speed .............................. 171 Deactivating ................................... 178
Storing and maintaining current Display message ............................ 233
speed ............................................. 170 Displays in the multifunction dis-
Cup holder play ................................................ 177
Driving tips .................................... 179
Center console .............................. 259
Function/notes ............................. 171
Important safety notes .................. 258
Customer Assistance Center Important safety notes .................. 172
Setting the specified minimum
(CAC) ..................................................... 26
distance ......................................... 177
Customer Relations Department ....... 26
Warning lamp ................................. 253
8 Index

Doors Driving Assistance package ........... 189

Automatic locking (on-board com- Dynamic handling package ............ 180
puter) ............................................. 207 HOLD function ............................... 181
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 79 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 190
Central locking/unlocking Parking Guidance ........................... 185
(SmartKey) ....................................... 72 PARKTRONIC ................................. 182
Control panel ................................... 37 Driving tips
Display message ............................ 240 Automatic transmission ................. 152
Emergency locking ........................... 80 Brakes ........................................... 166
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80 Break-in period .............................. 138
Important safety notes .................... 78 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 179
Opening (from inside) ...................... 78 Downhill gradient ........................... 166
Overview .......................................... 78 Drinking and driving ....................... 165
Drinking and driving ......................... 165 Driving abroad ............................... 108
Drive program Driving in winter ............................. 169
Automatic ...................................... 154 Driving on flooded roads ................ 168
Display ........................................... 151 Driving on wet roads ...................... 168
Manual ........................................... 154 Exhaust check ............................... 165
Manual (vehicles with Sports Fuel ................................................ 165
package AMG) ............................... 155 General .......................................... 164
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 209 Hydroplaning ................................. 168
Driver's door Icy road surfaces ........................... 169
see Doors Limited braking efficiency on sal-
Driving abroad ted roads ....................................... 167
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 283 Snow chains .................................. 313
Symmetrical low beam .................. 108 Symmetrical low beam .................. 108
Driving on flooded roads .................. 168 Wet road surface ........................... 167
Driving safety systems DVD video
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 201
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67 Dynamic handling package
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62 Function/notes ............................. 180
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) ............................................... 62 E
EBD (electronic brake force distri- EASY-ENTRY feature
bution) ............................................. 67 Activating/deactivating ................. 207
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Function/notes ............................. 101
gram) ............................................... 63 EASY-EXIT feature
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 63 Crash-responsive ........................... 102
Important safety information ........... 61 Function/notes ............................. 101
Overview .......................................... 61 Switching on/off ........................... 207
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 67 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Driving systems bution)
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 188 Display message ............................ 215
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 189 Function/notes ................................ 67
Cruise control ................................ 169 ECO display
Display message ............................ 231 Function/notes ............................. 165
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 171 On-board computer ....................... 198
 Index 9

ECO start/stop function Display message ............................ 230

Automatic engine start .................. 146 Filling capacity ............................... 350
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 144 Notes about oil grades ................... 349
Deactivating/activating ................. 147 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 279
General information ....................... 144 Temperature (on-board com-
Important safety notes .................. 143 puter) ............................................. 208
Introduction ................................... 143 Viscosity ........................................ 350
Electronic Stability Program ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) gram)
Emergency AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 209
Automatic measures after an acci- Characteristics ................................. 64
dent ................................................. 57 Deactivating/activating (AMG
Emergency release vehicles) .......................................... 65
Driver's door .................................... 80 Deactivating/activating (notes;
Trunk ............................................... 83 except AMG vehicles) ...................... 64
Vehicle ............................................. 80 Display message ............................ 213
Emergency spare wheel ETS .................................................. 63
General notes ................................ 341 Function/notes ................................ 63
Important safety notes .................. 341 General notes .................................. 63
Removing ....................................... 341 Important safety information ........... 64
Stowing .......................................... 342 Warning lamp ................................. 247
Technical data ............................... 344 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 63
Emergency Tensioning Devices Exhaust check ................................... 165
Activation ......................................... 54 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-
Emissions control tions) .................................................. 287
Service and warranty information .... 22 Exterior lighting
Engine Setting options .............................. 108
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 251 see Lights
Display message ............................ 228 Exterior mirrors
ECO start/stop function ................ 143 Adjusting ....................................... 103
Engine number ............................... 347 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104
Irregular running ............................ 149 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104
Jump-starting ................................. 301 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104
Starting problems .......................... 149 Folding in when locking (on-board
Starting the engine with the computer) ...................................... 208
SmartKey ....................................... 142 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 142 Storing settings (memory func-
Switching off .................................. 162 tion) ............................................... 106
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 306 Storing the parking position .......... 105
Engine electronics Eyeglasses compartment ................. 257
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149
Engine oil F
Adding ........................................... 280 Filler cap
Additives ........................................ 350
see Fuel filler flap
Checking the oil level ..................... 279
Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 347
Checking the oil level using the
Flat tire
dipstick .......................................... 279
MOExtended tires .......................... 293
10 Index

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 292 Opening/closing the garage door .. 273
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 294 Programming (button in the rear-
see Emergency spare wheel view mirror) ................................... 271
Floormats ........................................... 274 Gasoline ............................................. 348
Fog lamps Gear indicator (on-board com-
Switching on/off ........................... 109 puter) .................................................. 208
Front fog lamps Genuine parts ...................................... 21
Display message ............................ 226 Glove box ........................................... 256
Switching on/off ........................... 109
Fuel H
Additives ........................................ 349
Handbrake
Consumption statistics .................. 197
Displaying the current consump- see Parking brake
tion ................................................ 198 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 111
Displaying the range ...................... 198 Display message ............................ 242
Driving tips .................................... 165 Head bags
E10 ................................................ 348 Display message ............................ 222
Fuel gauge ....................................... 31 Operation ......................................... 48
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 348 Headlamps
Important safety notes .................. 348 Cleaning system (notes) ................ 352
Problem (malfunction) ................... 161 Fogging up ..................................... 113
Refueling ........................................ 158 see Automatic headlamp mode
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 348 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 100
Fuel filler flap Head restraints
Opening ......................................... 159 Adjusting ......................................... 98
Fuel level see NECK-PRO head restraints
Calling up the range (on-board Heating
computer) ...................................... 198 see Climate control
Fuel tank High-beam headlamps
Capacity ........................................ 348 Changing bulbs .............................. 116
Problem (malfunction) ................... 161 Display message ............................ 226
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool Switching on/off ........................... 111
kit) ...................................................... 292 Hill start assist .................................. 143
Fuses HOLD function
Allocation chart ............................. 306 Activating ....................................... 181
Before changing ............................. 306 Deactivating ................................... 181
Fuse box in the engine compart- Display message ............................ 231
ment .............................................. 307 Function/notes ............................. 181
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 307 Hood
Important safety notes .................. 306 Closing ........................................... 279
Display message ............................ 240
G Important safety notes .................. 278
Opening ......................................... 278
Garage door opener Horn ...................................................... 30
Clearing the memory ..................... 273 Hydroplaning ..................................... 168
General notes ................................ 270
Important safety notes .................. 270
 Index 11

I Knee bag .............................................. 47

Ignition lock
L
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 69 Lamps
Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist
Indicators Activating/deactivating ................. 204
see Turn signals Display message ............................ 232
Instrument cluster Function/information .................... 190
Overview .......................................... 31 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 209
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32 License plate lamp (display mes-
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 194 sage) ................................................... 226
Interior lighting Light function, active
Automatic control .......................... 113 Display message ............................ 227
Delayed switch-off (on-board Lights
computer) ...................................... 206 Activating/deactivating the inte-
Emergency lighting ........................ 114 rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 206
Manual control ............................... 114 Active light function ....................... 112
Overview ........................................ 113 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109
Reading lamp ................................. 113 Cornering light function ................. 111
Setting the brightness of the Driving abroad ............................... 108
ambient lighting (on-board com- Fogged up headlamps .................... 113
puter) ............................................. 205 Fog lamps ...................................... 109
Hazard warning lamps ................... 111
J High beam flasher .......................... 111
High-beam headlamps ................... 111
Jack Light switch ................................... 108
Storage location ............................ 292 Low-beam headlamps .................... 109
Using ............................................. 334 Parking lamps ................................ 110
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 301 Rear fog lamp ................................ 110
Setting the brightness of the
K ambient lighting (on-board com-
KEYLESS-GO puter) ............................................. 205
Convenience closing feature ............ 85 Standing lamps .............................. 110
Display message ............................ 242 Switching the daytime running
Locking ............................................ 73 lamps on/off (on-board com-
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 141 puter) ............................................. 205
Start/Stop button .......................... 140 Switching the exterior lighting
Starting the engine ........................ 142 delayed switch-off on/off (on-
Unlocking ......................................... 73 board computer) ............................ 206
Key positions Switching the surround lighting
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 140 on/off (on-board computer) .......... 206
SmartKey ....................................... 139 Turn signals ................................... 110
Kickdown see Interior lighting
Driving tips .................................... 153 see Replacing bulbs
Manual drive program .................... 157 Light sensor (display message) ....... 228
12 Index

Locking Search & Send ............................... 266

see Central locking Self-test ......................................... 262
Locking (doors) Speed alert .................................... 269
Automatic ........................................ 79 System .......................................... 262
Emergency locking ........................... 80 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 270
From inside (central locking but- Vehicle remote malfunction diag-
ton) .................................................. 79 nosis .............................................. 268
Locking centrally Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 267
see Central locking Mechanical key
Locking verification signal (on- Function/notes ................................ 74
board computer) ............................... 207 Locking vehicle ................................ 80
Low-beam headlamps Unlocking the driver's door .............. 80
Changing bulbs .............................. 116 Media Interface
Display message ............................ 225 see Separate operating instructions
Setting for driving abroad (sym- Memory card (audio) ......................... 201
metrical) ........................................ 108 Memory function ............................... 106
Switching on/off ........................... 109 Message memory (on-board com-
Luggage cover puter) .................................................. 212
see Trunk partition Messages
Lumbar support ................................... 99 see Display messages
Mirrors
M see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
M+S tires ............................................ 312
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 92 Mobile phone
Malfunction message Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201
see Display messages Modifying the programming
Manual transmission (SmartKey) ........................................... 73
Engaging reverse gear ................... 150 MOExtended tires .............................. 293
Gear lever ...................................... 150 Mounting wheels
Pulling away ................................... 142
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 336
Shift recommendation ................... 151
Mounting a new wheel ................... 336
Starting the engine ........................ 142
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 333
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Raising the vehicle ......................... 334
tions) .................................................. 286
Removing a wheel .......................... 335
mbrace Securing the vehicle against roll-
Call priority .................................... 265 ing away ........................................ 333
Display message ............................ 220 MP3
Downloading destinations see separate operating instructions
(COMAND) ..................................... 266 Multifunction display
Downloading routes ....................... 269
Function/notes ............................. 196
Emergency call .............................. 263
Permanent display ......................... 205
General notes ................................ 261
Multifunction steering wheel
Geo fencing ................................... 269
Operating the on-board computer .. 195
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 268
Overview .......................................... 33
MB info call button ........................ 265
Remote vehicle locking .................. 267
Roadside Assistance button .......... 264
 Index 13

N Message memory .......................... 212

Navigation menu ............................ 199
Navigation Operation ....................................... 195
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 199 RACETIMER ................................... 209
NECK-PRO head restraints Service menu ................................. 204
Important safety notes .................... 56 Settings menu ............................... 204
Operation ......................................... 56 Standard display ............................ 197
Resetting after being triggered ........ 56 Telephone menu ............................ 201
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Trip menu ...................................... 197
cle ....................................................... 138 Vehicle submenu ........................... 207
Video DVD operation ..................... 201
O Operating safety
Occupant Classification System Declaration of conformity ................ 25
(OCS) Important safety notes .................... 24
Conditions ....................................... 49 Operating system
Faults ............................................... 53 see On-board computer
Operation ......................................... 49 Operator's Manual
System self-test ............................... 51 Vehicle equipment ........................... 22
Occupant safety Outside temperature display ........... 195
Automatic measures after an acci- Overhead control panel ...................... 36
dent ................................................. 57
Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 P
Important safety notes .................... 41 Paint code number ............................ 346
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 60 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 285
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Panic alarm .......................................... 40
pant protection) ............................... 56 Parking
OCS
Important safety notes .................. 161
Conditions ....................................... 49 Parking brake ................................ 162
Faults ............................................... 53 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Operation ......................................... 49 passenger side ............................... 105
System self-test ............................... 51 see PARKTRONIC
Odometer ........................................... 197 Parking aid
Oil Parking Guidance ........................... 185
see Engine oil see Exterior mirrors
On-board computer see PARKTRONIC
AMG menu ..................................... 208 Parking assistance
Assistance menu ........................... 203 see PARKTRONIC
Audio menu ................................... 200 Parking brake
Convenience submenu .................. 207 Display message ............................ 215
Displaying a service message ........ 283 Electric parking brake .................... 162
Display messages .......................... 212 Warning lamp ................................. 250
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177 Parking Guidance
Factory settings submenu ............. 208
Display message ............................ 233
Important safety notes .................. 194
Important safety notes .................. 185
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 204
Parking lamps
Lighting submenu .......................... 205
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Menu overview .............................. 197
14 Index

PARKTRONIC Radio
Deactivating/activating ................. 184 Selecting a station ......................... 200
Driving system ............................... 182 Radio-wave reception/transmis-
Function/notes ............................. 182 sion in the vehicle
Important safety notes .................. 182 Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Problem (malfunction) ................... 185 Reading lamp ..................................... 113
Range of the sensors ..................... 183 Rear fog lamp
Warning display ............................. 184 Display message ............................ 227
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Switching on/off ........................... 110
Indicator lamp .................................. 41 Rear lamps
Problems (malfunction) .................. 224 see Lights
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 60 Rear-view mirror
Pivoting draft stop Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 103
see AIRGUIDE Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Rear window defroster
tions) .................................................. 288 Problem (malfunction) ................... 133
Power washers .................................. 285 Switching on/off ........................... 132
Power windows Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
see Side windows tem)
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Important safety notes .................. 352
protection) Refueling
Display message ............................ 220 Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Operation ......................................... 56 Important safety notes .................. 158
PRE-SAFE® Brake Refueling process .......................... 159
Activating/deactivating ................. 203 see Fuel
Display message ............................ 221 Releasing the parking lock man-
Function/notes ................................ 67 ually (automatic transmission) ........ 158
Warning lamp ................................. 253 Remote control
Program selector button .................. 153 Programming (garage door
Protection against theft opener) .......................................... 271
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69 Replacing bulbs
Immobilizer ...................................... 69 Important safety notes .................. 114
Protection of the environment Overview of bulb types .................. 115
General notes .................................. 21 Removing/replacing the cover
Pulling away (front wheel arch) .......................... 115
Automatic transmission ................. 142 Reporting safety defects .................... 26
Manual transmission ...................... 142 Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Q Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 231
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26 Warning lamp ................................. 251
see Fuel
R Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 209 Restraint system
Radar sensor system Display message ............................ 221
Activating/deactivating ................. 207 Introduction ..................................... 40
Display message ............................ 231
 Index 15

Warning lamp ................................. 250 Warning lamp ................................. 244

Warning lamp (function) ................... 41 Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Reverse gear Seats
Engaging (automatic transmis- Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98
sion) ............................................... 151 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98
Engaging (manual transmission) .... 150 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Reversible floor panel (trunk) .......... 258 port .................................................. 99
Reversing feature Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98
Side windows ................................... 83 Cleaning the cover ......................... 289
Trunk lid ........................................... 81 Correct driver's seat position ........... 96
Reversing lamps (display mes- Important safety notes .................... 97
sage) ................................................... 227 Overview .......................................... 97
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23 Seat heating problem ...................... 99
Roof Storing settings (memory func-
Display message ............................ 241 tion) ............................................... 106
Important safety notes .................... 87 Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100
Opening/closing (with roof Switching seat heating on/off ......... 99
switch) ............................................. 88 Selector lever
Opening/closing (with Smart- Cleaning ......................................... 288
Key) ................................................. 89 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 287
Overview .......................................... 87 Service center
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94 see Qualified specialist workshop
Relocking ......................................... 89 Service Center
Roof carrier ........................................ 258 see Qualified specialist workshop
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Service menu (on-board com-
guidelines) ......................................... 289 puter) .................................................. 204
Roof switch .......................................... 88 Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 350
S Coolant (engine) ............................ 351
Engine oil ....................................... 349
Safety Fuel ................................................ 348
Children in the vehicle ..................... 57 Important safety notes .................. 347
Child restraint systems .................... 59 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Occupant Classification System tem) ............................................... 352
(OCS) ............................................... 49 Washer fluid ................................... 352
Safety system Settings
see Driving safety systems Factory (on-board computer) ......... 208
Seat belts On-board computer ....................... 204
Adjusting the driver's and front- Setting the air distribution ............... 130
passenger seat belt ......................... 45 Setting the airflow ............................ 130
Cleaning ......................................... 289 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 209
Correct usage .................................. 44 Side impact air bag ............................. 48
Fastening ......................................... 44
Side marker lamp
Important safety guidelines ............. 42
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 116
Introduction ..................................... 42
Side marker lamp (display mes-
Releasing ......................................... 45
sage) ................................................... 227
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 208
16 Index

Side windows Standing lamps

Cleaning ......................................... 286 Display message ............................ 227
Convenience closing feature ............ 85 Switching on/off ........................... 110
Important safety information ........... 83 Start/stop function
Opening/closing (all) ....................... 84 see ECO start/stop function
Opening/closing (front) ................... 84 Starting (engine) ................................ 141
Overview .......................................... 83 Steering (display message) .............. 241
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87 Steering wheel
Resetting ......................................... 86 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101
SmartKey Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101
Changing the battery ....................... 75 Button overview ............................... 33
Changing the programming ............. 73 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 195
Checking the battery ....................... 75 Cleaning ......................................... 288
Convenience opening feature .......... 85 Important safety notes .................. 100
Display message ............................ 242 Paddle shifters ............................... 154
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 72 Storing settings (memory func-
Important safety notes .................... 72 tion) ............................................... 106
Loss ................................................. 77 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 154
Mechanical key ................................ 74 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 209
Opening/closing the roof ................ 89 Stowage areas ................................... 256
Overview .......................................... 72 Stowage compartments
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 139 Armrest (under) ............................. 257
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 77 Center console .............................. 257
Starting the engine ........................ 142 Cup holders ................................... 258
Snow chains ...................................... 313 Door ............................................... 257
Sockets Eyeglasses compartment ............... 257
Center console .............................. 261 Glove box ....................................... 256
General notes ................................ 261 Important safety information ......... 256
Under the armrest ......................... 261 Rear wall ........................................ 257
Spare wheel Stowage net ................................... 258
Stowing .......................................... 342 Stowage net ....................................... 258
Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Summer tires ..................................... 312
Special seat belt retractor .................. 58 Sun visor ............................................ 259
Speed, controlling Surround lighting (on-board com-
see Cruise control puter) .................................................. 206
Speedometer Switching air-recirculation mode
Activating/deactivating the addi- on/off ................................................. 133
tional speedometer ........................ 205
Digital ............................................ 198 T
In the Instrument cluster ................. 31
Segments ...................................... 195 Tachometer ........................................ 195
Selecting the unit of measure- Tail lamps
ment .............................................. 204 Display message ............................ 226
SPORT handling mode see Lights
Activating/deactivating (AMG Tank content
vehicles) .......................................... 65 Fuel gauge ....................................... 31
Warning lamp ................................. 248
 Index 17

Technical data Important safety notes .................. 318

Capacities ...................................... 347 Maximum ....................................... 316
Emergency spare wheel ................. 344 Notes ............................................. 315
Information .................................... 346 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 295
Tires/wheels ................................. 337 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 296
Vehicle data ................................... 353 Recommended ............................... 314
TELEAID Tire pressure loss warning sys-
Call priority .................................... 265 tem
Downloading destinations General notes ................................ 317
(COMAND) ..................................... 266 Important safety notes .................. 317
Downloading routes ....................... 269 Restarting ...................................... 318
Emergency call .............................. 263 Tire pressure monitor
General notes ................................ 261 Radio type approval for the tire
Geo fencing ................................... 269 pressure monitor ........................... 321
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 268 Tire pressure monitoring system
MB info call button ........................ 265 Checking the tire pressure elec-
Remote vehicle locking .................. 267 tronically ........................................ 320
Roadside Assistance button .......... 264 Function/notes ............................. 318
Search & Send ............................... 266 General notes ................................ 318
Self-test ......................................... 262 Important safety notes .................. 319
Speed alert .................................... 269 Restarting ...................................... 321
System .......................................... 262 Warning lamp ................................. 254
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 270 Warning message .......................... 320
Vehicle remote malfunction diag- Tires
nosis .............................................. 268 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 331
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 267 Average weight of the vehicle
Telephone occupants (definition) .................... 330
Accepting a call ............................. 202 Bar (definition) ............................... 330
Display message ............................ 241 Changing a wheel .......................... 332
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 201 Characteristics .............................. 329
Number from the phone book ........ 202 Checking ........................................ 311
Redialing ........................................ 202 Curb weight (definition) ................. 331
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 202 Definition of terms ......................... 329
Temperature Direction of rotation ...................... 332
Coolant .......................................... 194 Display message ............................ 236
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 208 Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 208 pants (definition) ............................ 332
Outside temperature ...................... 195 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Setting (climate control) ................ 129 (TIN) ............................................... 329
Time DOT (Department of Transporta-
see separate operating instructions tion) (definition) ............................. 330
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 209 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 294 (definition) ..................................... 330
Tire pressure GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 318 inition) ........................................... 330
Checking manually ........................ 317 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Display message ............................ 236 ing) (definition) .............................. 330
Important safety notes .................. 310
18 Index

Increased vehicle weight due to Uniform Tire Quality Grading

optional equipment (definition) ...... 330 Standards (definition) .................... 330
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 330 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 332
Labeling (overview) ........................ 326 Wheel and tire combination ........... 339
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 331 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 330
Load index ..................................... 328 see Flat tire
Load index (definition) ................... 331 Towing
M+S tires ....................................... 312 Important safety guidelines ........... 303
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Installing the towing eye ................ 304
(definition) ..................................... 330 Removing the towing eye ............... 304
Maximum load on a tire (defini- With the rear axle raised ................ 305
tion) ............................................... 331 Towing away
Maximum permissible tire pres- With both axles on the ground ....... 305
sure (definition) ............................. 331 Tow-starting
Maximum tire load ......................... 328 Emergency engine starting ............ 306
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 331 Important safety notes .................. 303
MOExtended tires .......................... 312 Installing the towing eye ................ 304
Optional equipment weight (defi- Removing the towing eye ............... 304
nition) ............................................ 331 Transmission
Overview ........................................ 310 Selector lever ................................ 151
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- see Automatic transmission
inition) ........................................... 331 see Manual transmission
Replacing ....................................... 332 Transporting the vehicle .................. 305
Service life ..................................... 312 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 331 tions) .................................................. 288
Speed rating (definition) ................ 330 Trip computer (on-board com-
Storing ........................................... 332 puter) .................................................. 197
Structure and characteristics Trip odometer
(definition) ..................................... 329 Calling up ....................................... 197
Summer tires ................................. 312 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 198
Temperature .................................. 325 Trunk
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Emergency release .......................... 82
(definition) ..................................... 331 Important safety notes .................... 80
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 331 Locking separately ........................... 82
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 331 Opening/closing (manually from
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 330 outside) ............................................ 81
Tire size (data) ............................... 337 Opening (automatically from out-
Tire size designation, load-bearing side) ................................................. 82
capacity, speed rating .................... 326 Overview .......................................... 80
Tire tread ....................................... 311 Trunk lid
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 331
Display message ............................ 240
Total load limit (definition) ............. 332
Opening/closing .............................. 80
Traction ......................................... 325
Opening dimensions ...................... 353
Traction (definition) ....................... 332
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 353
Tread wear ..................................... 325
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 324
 Index 19

Trunk partition Vehicle emergency locking ................ 80

Display message ............................ 241 Vehicle identification number
General notes .................................. 89 see VIN
Opening/closing .............................. 90 Vehicle identification plate .............. 346
Turn signals Vehicle tool kit .................................. 292
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 116 Video
Display message ............................ 225 Operating the DVD ......................... 201
Switching on/off ........................... 110 VIN ...................................................... 346
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate W

U Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 245
Unlocking Brakes ........................................... 245
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80 Check Engine ................................. 251
From inside the vehicle (central Coolant .......................................... 251
unlocking button) ............................. 79 Distance warning ........................... 253
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 253
V ESP® .............................................. 247
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 260 ESP® OFF ....................................... 248
Vehicle Overview .......................................... 32
Correct use ...................................... 26 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 41
Data acquisition ............................... 27 Reserve fuel ................................... 251
Display message ............................ 238 Restraint system ............................ 250
Equipment ....................................... 22 Seat belt ........................................ 244
Individual settings .......................... 204 SPORT handling mode ................... 248
Limited Warranty ............................. 27 Tire pressure monitor .................... 254
Loading .......................................... 322 Warranty .............................................. 22
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 80 Washer fluid
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 72 Display message ............................ 242
Lowering ........................................ 336 Wheel and tire combination
Maintenance .................................... 23 see Tires
Parking for a long period ................ 164 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 336
Pulling away ................................... 142 Wheel chock ...................................... 333
Raising ........................................... 334 Wheels
Reporting problems ......................... 26 Changing a wheel .......................... 332
Securing from rolling away ............ 333 Checking ........................................ 311
Towing away .................................. 303 Cleaning ......................................... 286
Tow-starting ................................... 303 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 333
Transporting .................................. 305 Emergency spare wheel ................. 341
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 80 Important safety notes .................. 310
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 72 Interchanging/changing ................ 332
Vehicle data ................................... 353 Mounting a new wheel ................... 336
Vehicle battery Mounting a wheel .......................... 333
see Battery (vehicle) Overview ........................................ 310
Vehicle data ....................................... 353 Removing a wheel .......................... 335
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 353 Storing ........................................... 332
20 Index

Tightening torque ........................... 336

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 337
Windows
see Side windows
Wind screen
Inserting and removing .................... 90
Preparing for installation .................. 90
see AIRGUIDE
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 131
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 281
Notes ............................................. 352
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 242
Problem (malfunction) ................... 120
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118
Switching on/off ........................... 117
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 312
Slippery road surfaces ................... 169
Snow chains .................................. 313
Winter operation
Overview ........................................ 312
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 312
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 286
Important safety notes .................. 118
Replacing ....................................... 118
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 288
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop

Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 130
 Introduction 21

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when
tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
sumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
the following areas of your vehicle:
them.
Rdoors
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should Rdoor pillars
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats
qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit
Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console
starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out
is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
from the vehicle in front. tems.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
braking. qualified specialist workshop.

Z
22 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should
as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle.
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and Warranty
accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet.
cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms
therefore be used. and conditions:
More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models.
REmission Performance Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws)
Benz parts (Y page 346). Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

ranty Information booklet, have an author-
This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War-
your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to
print. Country-specific differences are possi- you.
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
 Introduction 23

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

nia
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you
more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our
occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA)
tion results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the
tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty
of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio.
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
gory (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times and you have directly notified Change of address or change of own-
us in writing of the need for its repair, or ership
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please
repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change"
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-
total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-
One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

Z
24 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Center (USA) at the hotline number Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or nance work as well as any required repairs
Customer Service (Canada) at carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1-800-387-0100.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Vehicle operation outside the USA
safety-relevant functions are only available
and Canada
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign for example, the power steering and the brake
countries, please be aware that: boosting effect. You will require considerably
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
not be readily available. of an accident.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic con- G WARNING
verter. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
engine damage. of fire.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
for delivery in Europe through our European check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
Delivery Program. For details, consult an particular, remove parts of plants or other
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to flammable materials which have become
one of the following addresses. trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC G WARNING
European Delivery Department Modifications to electronic components, their
One Mercedes Drive software as well as wiring can impair their
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 function and/or the function of other net-
In Canada worked components. In particular, systems
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
European Delivery Department
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
98 Vanderhoof Avenue the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
Operating safety should have all work to electrical and elec-
Important safety notes tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
 Introduction 25

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- approved by the party responsible for com-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- pliance could void the user’s authority to
dered invalid. operate the equipment."
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
curb or an unpaved road following two conditions: (1) These devices
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a may not cause interference, and (2) These
curb or a hole in the road devices must accept any interference, includ-
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage ing interference that may cause undesired
or parts of the chassis operation of the device."
In situations like this, the body, the under-
carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage Diagnostics connection
being visible. Components damaged in this The diagnostics connection is only intended
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
an accident, no longer withstand the strain a qualified specialist workshop.
they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, G WARNING
combustible materials such as leaves, If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
grass or twigs can gather between the connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
these materials come in contact with hot the operating safety of the vehicle could be
parts of the exhaust system, they can catch affected. There is a risk of an accident.
fire. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
In such situations, have the vehicle tics connection in the vehicle.
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. If on con- G WARNING
tinuing your journey you notice that driving Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
vehicle immediately, paying attention to The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
road and traffic conditions. In such cases, jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
visit a qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
Declarations of conformity securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Vehicle components which receive
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
and/or transmit radio waves
top of one another.
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- ! If the engine is switched off and equip-
ation is subject to the following two condi- ment on the diagnostics connection is
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- used, the starter battery may discharge.
ful interference, and 2) These devices must Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
accept any interference received, including connection can lead to emissions monitoring
interference that may cause undesired oper- information being reset, for example. This
ation. Changes or modifications not expressly may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
Z
26 Introduction

requirements of the next emissions test dur- again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-
ing the main inspection. tact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Qualified specialist workshop
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a One Mercedes Drive
qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
fications to correctly carry out the work In Canada
required on your vehicle. This is especially the Customer Relations Department
case for work relevant to safety. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
let. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety Reporting safety defects
Rservice and maintenance work USA only:
Rrepair work The following text is published as required of
Ralterations, installation work and modifica- manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
tions Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rwork on electronic components
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
If you remove any warning stickers, you or inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
Leave warning stickers in position. ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Observe the following information when driv- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
ing your vehicle: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
motor vehicles
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590.
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- You can also obtain other information about
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
http://www.safercar.gov
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
 Introduction 27

Limited Warranty such as during air bag deployment or when

hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
! Follow the instructions in this manual to record data related to vehicle dynamics
about the proper operation of your vehicle and safety systems for a short period of time,
as well as about possible vehicle damage. typically 30 seconds or less.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
culpable contraventions against these
such data as:
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the Rhow various systems in your vehicle are
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. operating
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts are fastened
Data stored in the vehicle Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the

Data recording accelerator and/or brake pedal and

Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic
This data can help provide a better under-
information relating to vehicle operation, mal-
standing of the circumstances in which
functions, and user settings. This may include
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
information about the performance or status
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
of various systems, including but not limited
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
tems, that is stored and can be read out with
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
suitable devices, particularly when the vehi-
and crash location) are recorded. However,
cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to
other parties, such as law enforcement, can
properly diagnose and service your vehicle or
combine the EDR data with the type of per-
to further optimize and develop vehicle func-
sonal identification data routinely acquired
tions.
during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is nee-
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR,
and special equipment is required. In addition
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s that have the special equipment, such as law
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain enforcement, can read the information by
situations, and the location of the vehicle may accessing the vehicle or the EDR.
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
system. matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
For additional information please refer to the accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
Terms and Conditions. extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-
Event data recorders bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR sonnel.
is to record data that will assist in under- MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
in certain crash or near crash-like situations, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of

Z
28 Introduction

the lessee. Exceptions to this representation

include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
ernment; in connection with or arising out of
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-
plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.
Tampering with, altering, modifying or remov-
ing the EDR component may result in a mal-
function of the SRS Module and other sys-
tems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
 29

Cockpit ................................................. 30
Instrument cluster .............................. 31
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33

At a glance
Center console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 36
Door control panel .............................. 37
 30 Cockpit

Cockpit
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle E Adjusts the steering wheel
shifters 154 manually 100
; Combination switch 110 F Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 100
= Instrument cluster 31
G Cruise control lever 170
? Horn
H Electric parking brake 162
A PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 182 I Diagnostics connection 25
B Overhead control panel 36 J Opens the hood 278
C Climate control systems 122 K Light switch 108
D Ignition lock 139
Start/Stop button 140
 Instrument cluster 31

Instrument cluster
Displays and controls

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 194
ments 195
A Multifunction display 196
; Fuel gage
B Instrument cluster lighting 194
= Tachometer 195
 32 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: L Low-beam head- F 6 Restraint system 40
lamps 109
G ü Seat belt 244
; T Parking lamps 110
H M SPORT handling
= K High-beam head- mode in AMG vehicles 248
lamps 111
I ? Coolant 251
? ÷ ESP® 247
J R Rear fog lamp 110
A F Electric parking brake
K N Front fog lamps 109
(red) 245
L ; Check Engine 251
B ! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 245 M 8 Reserve fuel 251
C · Distance warning 253 N å ESP® OFF 247
D #! Turn signals 110 O ! ABS 245
E h Tire pressure monitor 318 P $ Brakes 245
 Multifunction steering wheel 33

Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Multifunction display 196 A =;
; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 195
separate operating instruc- 9:
tions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 195
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice Con-
Confirms your selection 195
trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions Hiding display messages 212

? ~ B %
Rejects or ends a call 201 Back 195
Exits phone book/redial Switches off the Voice Con-
memory trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
 34 Center console

Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: COMAND; see the separate B £ Hazard warning
operating instructions lamps 111
; c Seat heating 99 C 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON/OFF indicator lamp 41
= Ò AIRSCARF 100
D å ESP® 64
? c PARKTRONIC 182
E à Dynamic handling
A è ECO start/stop func-
package with sports mode 180
tion 144
 Center console 35

Center console, lower section

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
F Stowage compartment 256 J Roof switch cover 88
Ashtray 260 K COMAND controller; see
Cigarette lighter 260 the separate operating
Socket 261 instructions
G Selector lever 151 L Ú Selects the drive pro-
gram 153
H Cup holder 258
Ñ Selects the drive pro-
I Stowage compartment with gram (AMG vehicles) 153
Media Interface 256
 36 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: p Switches the left- C ï MB Info call button
hand reading lamp on/off 113 (mbrace system) 265
; c Switches the interior D Rear-view mirror 103
lighting on/off 114
E Buttons for the garage door
= µ Operates MAGIC SKY opener 273
CONTROL 92
F F Roadside Assistance
? p Switches the right- call button (mbrace sys-
hand reading lamp on/off 113 tem) 264
A | Switches the auto- G G SOS button (mbrace
matic interior lighting con- system) 263
trol on/off 113
B Eyeglasses compartment 257
 Door control panel 37

Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Opens the door 78 B \ Selects the right exte-
rior mirror 103
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 79 C W Opens/closes the
right side window 83
= Adjusts the seats electri-
cally 98 D W Opens/closes the left
side window 83
? r45=
Stores settings for the seat, E 7 Adjusts the exterior
exterior mirrors and steer- mirrors 103
ing wheel 106
F Z Selects the left exte-
A ö Folds the exterior mir- rior mirror 103
rors in/out 104
38
 39

Useful information .............................. 40

Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Occupant safety .................................. 40
Children in the vehicle ........................ 57

Safety
Pets in the vehicle .............................. 60
Driving safety systems ....................... 61
Protection against theft ..................... 69
 40 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety

Restraint system: introduction
i This Operator's manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of cle occupants coming into contact with parts
publication of the Operator's manual.
Safety

of the vehicle's interior in the event of an

Country-specific differences are possible. accident. The restraint system can also
Please note that your vehicle may not be reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
equipped with all features described. This are subjected during an accident.
also applies to safety-related systems and The restraint system comprises:
functions.
RSeat belt system
i Read the information on qualified special- RAir bags
ist workshops (Y page 26).
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
Panic alarm
all vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 44)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
properly (Y page 97).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the cor-
rect driver's seat position (Y page 96).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 46).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
X To activate: press ! button : for at
belt. As an additional safety device, the air
least one second.
bag increases the level of protection for vehi-
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
cle occupants in the event of an accident. For
flashes.
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
X To deactivate: press ! button :
protection offered by the seat belt is suffi-
again. cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an
or accident occurs, only the air bags that
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. increase protection in that particular accident
or situation are deployed. However, seat belts
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
and air bags generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- side.
cle.
Information on restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and air bags"
(Y page 54).
For more information about children traveling
with you in the vehicle and on child restraint
 Occupant safety 41

systems, see "Children in the vehicle" G WARNING

(Y page 57). If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
system components may be triggered unin-
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
Important safety notes the event of an accident with a high rate of

Safety
G WARNING vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
Modifications to the restraint system may
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
even fatal injury.
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an Have the restraint system checked and
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
This poses an increased risk of injury or even soon as possible.
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
components or their software. lamp
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lamp

The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
at regular intervals while the engine is run- and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec- lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
ted in good time. tion System (OCS).
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni- informs you about the status of the front-
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a passenger front air bag.
few seconds after the engine is started. The
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
components of the restraint system are in
lamp:
operational readiness.
Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
A malfunction has occurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp: deactivated. They will then not be deployed
in the event of an accident.
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is
Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger
switched on
front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
accident, all deployment criteria are met,
the engine running
the front-passenger front air bag is
Rlights up again while the engine is running deployed.

Z
 42 Occupant safety

The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp The seat belt system comprises:
is inoperative. It lights up briefly when the RSeat belts
ignition is switched on and then goes out
REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat
again.
belt force limiters
Depending on the person in the front-
If the seat belt is pulled by the belt loop
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
Safety

quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt

bag must either be disabled or enabled; see
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be
the following points. You must make sure of
extracted any further.
this both before and during a journey.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens
RChildren in a child restraint system: the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt
whether the front-passenger front air bag is close against the body. However it does not
enabled or deactivated depends on the pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction
installed child restraint system, and the age of the backrest.
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
observe the notes on the "Occupant clas-
correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
sification system (OCS)" (Y page 49) and
ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57).
There you will also find instructions on When triggered, seat belt force limiters help
backwards- and forwards-facing child to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
restraint systems on the front-passenger the vehicle occupant.
seat. The seat belt force limiters are synchronized
RAll other persons: depending on the clas- with the front air bags, which absorb part of
sification of the person in the front- the deceleration force. This can reduce the
passenger seat, the front-passenger front force exerted on the vehicle occupants during
air bag is enabled or deactivated an accident.
(Y page 49). Be sure to observe the notes ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
on "Seat belts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags" do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
(Y page 46). There you can also find infor- of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
mation on the correct seat position. erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
accident, which will then need to be
Seat belts replaced.
Introduction
Important safety notes
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occu- The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- tems is required by law in:
cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- Rall 50 states
cle occupants coming into contact with parts Rthe U.S. territories
of the vehicle interior or being ejected from Rthe District of Columbia
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps
Rall Canadian provinces
to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-
tion in relation to the air bag. Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
their seat belts before starting the journey.
 Occupant safety 43

G WARNING appropriate to the age, weight and size of

If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- the child
not protect as intended. Furthermore, an Ralways observe the instructions and safety
incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi- notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-
tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- tion of this Operator's Manual
(Y page 57) in addition to the child

Safety
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or restraint system manufacturer's installa-
even fatal injury. tion instructions
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
belt. tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49)
G WARNING
G WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
The seat belt does not offer the intended level protective function if:
of protection if you have not moved the back-
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could dirty, bleach or dyed
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This extremely dirty
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
injury. anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
Adjust the seat properly before beginning fied
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
is in an almost vertical position and that the although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
across the center of your shoulder. seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices
G WARNING could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot when necessary. This poses an increased risk
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- of injury or even fatal injury.
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
example, in an accident, during braking or an ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
abrupt change of direction. This poses an immediately at a qualified specialist work-
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. shop.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint Only use seat belts that have been approved
systems. for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such
modifications could invalidate the vehicle's
If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft general operating permit.
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. The child restraint system must be

Z
 44 Occupant safety

Proper use of the seat belts between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
(Y page 42).
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
vehicle's occupants.
seat belt correctly before beginning the jour-
Safety

ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- Seat belts are only intended to secure and
pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
rectly while the vehicle is in motion. the notes in the "Stowage options/compart-
ments" section for securing objects, luggage
When fastening the seat belt, always make
or loads (Y page 256).
sure that:
Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the Fastening seat belts
belt buckle belonging to that seat.
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.
Please take note of the safety notes on seat
belts (Y page 42) and the notes on their cor-
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter rect use (Y page 44).
coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using
the shoulder section of the belt. X Adjust the seat (Y page 96).
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
The seat backrest must be in an almost
pointed or fragile objects. upright position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt loop
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, = and engage belt tongue ; into belt
store these in a suitable place. buckle :.
The driver's and front-passenger's seat
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a
belts are automatically pulled taut as
time.
required, see “Belt adjustment”
Infants and children must never travel sit- (Y page 45).
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
event of an accident, they could be crushed
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
 Occupant safety 45

In order to attach the child restraint system The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the co- Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle
driver's seat is equipped with a child seat and
lock. Further information on the "Child seat
Rthe ignition is switched on
lock" (Y page 58).
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain

Safety
Releasing seat belts tightening force if any slack is detected
between the vehicle occupant and the seat
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue while it is adjusting.
will be trapped in the door or in the seat You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on
mechanism. This could damage the door, and off in the on-board computer
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- (Y page 208).
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced. Belt warning for the driver and front
Visit a qualified specialist workshop. passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all occupants
must fasten their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may
be a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
time the engine is started. If, after
six seconds, the driver or front-passenger
seat belt has not been fastened and the doors
are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up again. As soon as the driver's and
front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a
front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp goes out.
X Press release button :, hold belt
tongue ; and guide it back towards belt If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
loop =. the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is
Seat belt adjustment
fastened.
AMG vehicles: the "seat-belt adjustment" If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
function is not available. (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of passenger seat belts are not fastened, a
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This warning tone sounds. The warning tone
function adjusts the driver's and front- sounds with increasing intensity for
passenger seat belt to the upper body of the 60 seconds or until the driver or front
occupants. passenger have fastened their seat belts.

Z
 46 Occupant safety

If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt your journey. Always make sure that the
warning is activated again. seat is in an almost upright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
i For more information on the 7 seat
the head at about eye level.
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-
RMove the driver's and front-passenger
Safety

cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat

belts" (Y page 244). seats as far back as possible. The driver's
seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
Air bags ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-
side. This allows the air bag to be fully
Introduction deployed.
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against
An air bag complements the correctly fas- the door or side window. You may other-
tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat wise be in the deployment area of the air
belt. The air bag provides additional protec- bags.
tion in applicable accident situations. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in

Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
The different air bag systems function inde- dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
pendently from one another (Y page 54). erwise be in the deployment area of the air
bag.
However, no system available today can com-
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
cannot be worn correctly.
which the air bag must be deployed.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
Important safety notes observe the following notes:
RAlways secure children under 12 years of
G WARNING age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, suitable child restraint systems.
the air bag cannot protect as intended and ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing
could even cause additional injury when child restraint system on the front-
deployed. This poses an increased risk of passenger seat when the front-passenger
injury or even fatal injury. front air bag is deactivated. If the
To avoid hazardous situations, always make PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: permanently lit, the front-passenger front
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, air bag is deactivated (Y page 41).
including pregnant women RAlways observe the instructions and safety
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
est possible distance to the air bags tem (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children
Rfollow the following instructions
in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
Always make sure that there are no objects installation instructions.
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
 Occupant safety 47

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- Front air bags

vent the air bag from functioning cor-
rectly. Before starting your journey and to
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air
bag as it deploys, make sure that:

Safety
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side Driver's air bag : inflates in front of the
windows. steering wheel; front-passenger air bag ;
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
inflates in front of and above the glove box.
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
such objects in a suitable place. tional head and thorax protection on the front
seats.
G WARNING The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects shows you the status of the front-passenger
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer front air bag (Y page 41).
function correctly. There is an increased risk Front-passenger air bag ; is only deployed
of injury. if:
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
Rthe Occupant Classification System (OCS)
to it.
recognizes that the front-passenger seat is
occupied (Y page 49)
G WARNING
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
lamp is not lit (Y page 49)
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a

ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the high accident severity
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly Knee bags
any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer-

ing column and front-passenger knee bag ;

Z
 48 Occupant safety

under the glove box. The driver's and front- The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger knee bags are triggered together passenger side deploys under the following
with the front air bags. conditions:
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- passenger seat is occupied or
tection.
Safety

Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt

buckle of the front-passenger seat
Side impact air bags
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
G WARNING buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
ment is independent of whether the front-
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
passenger seat is occupied or not.
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System Head bags
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.

Head bags : deploy in the area of the side

windows at the front.
When deployed, the headbag enhances the
level of protection for the head. However, it
does not protect your:
Rchest
Side impact air bags : deploy next to the
outer bolster of the seat backrest. Rarms

When deployed, the side impact air bag offers In the event of a side impact, the headbag is
additional thorax protection. However, it does deployed on the side on which the impact
not protect the: occurs.
Rhead If the system determines that they can offer
Rneck
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a headbag may be deployed in other
Rarms
accident situations (Y page 54).
In the event of a side impact, the side impact
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
 Occupant safety 49

The headbag on the front-passenger side If you install a child restraint system on the
does not deploy under the following condi- front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
tions: correct positioning of the child restraint sys-
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger tem. Never place objects under or behind the
seat is unoccupied. child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The
entire base of the child restraint system must

Safety
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
tened.
passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt facing child restraint system must, as far as
buckle, the headbag on the front-passenger possible, be resting on the backrest of the
side deploys if an appropriate accident situa- front-passenger seat.
tion occurs. In this case, it will deploy regard-
The child restraint system must not touch the
less of whether the front-passenger seat is
roof or be put under strain by the head
occupied or not.
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
rest and the head restraint position accord-
ingly.
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint
Introduction system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categorizes the person in the front-passenger
Occupant Classification System opera-
seat. Depending on that result, the front-
tion (OCS)
passenger front air bag and front-passenger
knee bag are either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe front-passenger head bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Prerequisites
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly : PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Rin an almost upright position with their ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
back against the seat backrest PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp :
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi- informs you whether the front-passenger
ble front air bag is deactivated.
If the front passenger does not observe these X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- ignition lock, or press the Start/Stop but-
fication, e.g. because the front passenger: ton once or twice on vehicles with KEY-
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- LESS-GO.
selves on a vehicle armrest The system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
from the seat cushion is inoperative. It lights up briefly when the
Z
 50 Occupant safety

ignition is switched on and then goes out bled in accordance with the person in the
again. front-passenger seat
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
must light up for approximately six seconds. back as far back as possible.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rthe person is seated correctly.
Safety

then displays the status of the front- Make sure, both before and during the jour-
passenger front air bag. If the status of the ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front-passenger front air bag changes while front air bag is correct.
the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display
message may appear in the instrument clus- G WARNING
ter (Y page 224). When the front-passenger
If you secure a child in a child restraint system
seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
on the front-passenger seat and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
aware of the status of the front-passenger
off, the front-passenger front air bag can
front air bag both before and during the jour-
deploy in the event of an accident. The child
ney.
could be struck by the air bag. This poses an
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
lamp:
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
Ris lit, the front-passenger front air bag is bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
deactivated. They will then not be deployed BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
in the event of an accident.
Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger G WARNING
front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
accident, all deployment criteria are met, restraint system on the front-passenger seat
the front-passenger front air bag is and you position the front-passenger seat too
deployed. close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
G WARNING
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of cator lamp is lit, for example
an accident and cannot perform its intended Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
protective function. A person in the front- AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
passenger seat could then, for example, come This poses an increased risk of injury or even
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- fatal injury.
cially if the person is sitting too close to the Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
injury or even fatal injury. belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
When the front-passenger seat is occupied, belt loop to the shoulder belt guide on the
always ensure that: child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
Rthe classification of the person in the front- must be routed forwards and downwards
passenger seat is correct and the front- from the vehicle belt loop. Always observe the
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
 Occupant safety 51

If OCS determines that: If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure

Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp cle" (Y page 57).
lights up after the system self-test and When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6
remains lit. This indicates that the front- restraint system warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG

Safety
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
child of up to 12 months old, in a standard The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR ted in this case and does not deploy during an
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the accident. Have the system checked by quali-
system self-test and remains lit. This indi- fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult
cates that the front-passenger front air bag an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
is deactivated. front-passenger seat should only be repaired
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in a
standard child restraint system, the If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-
can go out after the system self-test. This essary repair work carried out at an author-
indicates that the front-passenger front air ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
bag is activated. The result of the classifi- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
cation is dependent on, among other fac- mends that you only use seat accessories
tors, the child restraint system and the that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
child's stature. Make sure that the condi- If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
tions for a correct classification are met. If mean that the front-passenger front air bag
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator will also deploy. The Occupant Classification
lamp remains off, do not install a child System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the
restraint system on the front-passenger front-passenger seat. Depending on that
seat. result, the front-passenger front air bag is
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a either enabled or deactivated.
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager
or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG System self-test
OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit
after the system self-test depending on the G DANGER
result of the classification or, alternatively, If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
goes out. lamp does not light up during the system self-
- if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
test, then the system is malfunctioning. The
lamp is off, move the front-passenger front-passenger front air bag might be trig-
seat as far back as possible. gered unintentionally or might not be trig-
gered at all in the event of an accident with
- if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
high deceleration. This poses an increased
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature risk of injury or even fatal injury.
should not use the front-passenger seat.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
adult or a person of a stature correspond- on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR pant Classification System (OCS) checked
BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
system self-test. This indicates that the cialist workshop.
front-passenger front air bag is activated.

Z
 52 Occupant safety

G DANGER facing child restraint system must, as far as

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator possible, be resting on the backrest of the
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In lation instructions.
Safety

this case, the front-passenger front air bag

cannot perform its intended protective func- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the sta-
passenger seat. tus of the front-passenger front air bag
(Y page 49).
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially For more information about the OCS, see
if the person is sitting too close to the dash- "Problems with the Occupant Classification
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or System" (Y page 53).
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-
 Occupant safety 53

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is

Safety
BAG OFF indicator incorrect.
lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).
though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
passenger seat is occu-
front-passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
person of a stature cor-
responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on.
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
The front-passenger the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as pos-
seat is: sible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If nec-
Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied by the X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
weight of a child up seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
to 12 months old in a passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
child restraint sys- the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
tem X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do
not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z
 54 Occupant safety

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning released. The 6 restraint system warning

Devices and air bags lamp will light up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
Important safety notes hearing. The powder released is generally not
G WARNING hazardous to health, it could however cause
short-term breathing difficulties in people
Safety

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
with asthma or other respiratory problems. In
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
order to prevent breathing difficulties, you
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- do so, or open the window.
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
Air bags and pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
contain perchlorate material, which may
G WARNING require special handling or environmental
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- protection measures. Check with your local
tection and cannot provide the intended pro- government’s disposal guidelines. California
tection in an accident. There is an increased residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
risk of injury. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- index.cfm.
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced. Method of operation
It is important for your safety and that of your During the first stage of a collision, the
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
and to have any malfunctioning air bags tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-
repaired. This will help to make sure the air ation or acceleration, such as:
bags continue to perform their protective RDuration
function for the vehicle occupants in the
RDirection
event of a crash.
RIntensity
G WARNING Based on the evaluation of this data, the
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices restraint system control unit triggers the belt
that have been deployed are no longer opera- tensioners in the event of a frontal or rear
tional and are unable to perform their inten- collision.
ded protective function. This poses an If the restraint system control unit detects a
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. high accident severity, additional compo-
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- nents of the restraint system are activated
sioning Devices which have been triggered independently of one another in certain fron-
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist tal collision situations:
workshop.
RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to passenger kneebag
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- Depending on the person occupying the front-
ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- passenger seat, the front-passenger air bag is
ble. activated or deactivated. The front-passenger
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air front air bag can only be deployed in an acci-
bags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a dent if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
small amount of powder may also be tor lamp is off. Observe the information on the
 Occupant safety 55

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp If the restraint system control unit detects a
(Y page 41). side impact or an overturn situation, the rel-
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. evant restraint system components are acti-
During the first deployment stage, the front vated independently of one another depend-
air bag fills with propellant gas which reduces ing on the apparent type of accident. If addi-
the risk of injury. The second stage is then tional protection for the vehicle occupants is

Safety
triggered within milliseconds, filling the front determined in this situation, the belt tension-
air bag with the maximum amount of propel- ers are also triggered.
lant gas. RSidebag on the side on which the impact
The deployment thresholds for the Emer- occurs, independently of the belt tensioner
gency Tensioning Devices and air bags are and of the use of the seat belt on the driv-
calculated on the basis of the vehicle decel- er's seat
eration or acceleration occurring at various The sidebag on the front-passenger side
points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp- deploys under the following conditions:
tive in nature. The air bag must be deployed - the OCS system detects that the front-
on time, at the start of the collision. passenger seat is occupied or
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- - the belt tongue has engaged in the belt
tion and the direction of the force are essen- buckle of the front-passenger seat.
tially determined by:
RHeadbag on the side on which the impact
Rdistribution of the force during the impact occurs, independently of the use of the seat
Rcollision angle belt and independently of whether the
Rdeformation characteristics of the vehicle front-passenger seat is occupied
Rcharacteristics of the object with which the RHeadbags on the driver's and front-
vehicle has collided passenger sides in certain overturn situa-
Factors which can only be seen and measured tions if the system determines that they
after the collision has occurred do not play a can offer additional protection to that pro-
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, vided by the seat belt
nor do they provide an indication of air bag i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
deployment. dent. The various air bag systems work
The vehicle may be considerably deformed independently of each other.
without an air bag being deployed. This is the How the air bag system works is deter-
case if only relatively easily deformable parts mined by the severity of the accident detec-
have been hit and a high rate of deceleration ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or
has not been reached. Conversely, an air bag acceleration, and the apparent type of acci-
may be deployed even though the vehicle suf- dent:
fers only minor deformation. This is the case
Rfrontal collision
if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as
Rside impact
the longitudinal body members are hit in an
accident and the rate of deceleration is suffi- Rrollover
cient.

Z
 56 Occupant safety

NECK-PRO head restraints Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head

restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
Safety

impaired if you:
Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the
head restraints, for example
Ruse head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the event
of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other Do not insert your finger between the uphols-
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk tery of the head restraint and the seat. Pay
of injury. particular attention while resetting the NECK-
Do not attach any objects to the head PRO head restraints.
restraints and do not use head restraint cov- X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
ers. cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
Method of operation X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down as far as it will go in the direction of
NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli-
arrow ;.
hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-
PRO head restraints on the driver's and front- X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint

passenger seats are moved forwards and cushion back in the direction of arrow =
upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of until the cushion engages.
a certain severity. This provides better head X Repeat this procedure for the second
support. NECK-PRO head restraint.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
triggered in an accident, you must reset the requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
front-passenger seat (Y page 56). Other- restraints, have this work carried out at a
wise, the additional protection will not be qualified specialist workshop.
available in the event of another rear-end col-
lision. You can recognize when NECK-PRO
head restraints have been triggered by the
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
fact that they have moved forwards and can
protection system)
no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have Introduction
the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for
functionality at a qualified specialist work- PRE-SAFE® is only available in vehicles with
shop after a rear-end collision. the Driving Assistance package.
AMG vehicles: PRE-SAFE® is not available.
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the
vehicle occupants.
 Children in the vehicle 57

Important safety notes The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of

the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Infor-
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
mation about the convenience function can
footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-
be found under "Belt adjustment"
ger that the seats and/or objects could be
(Y page 45).
damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Safety
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-
SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of Automatic measures after an acci-
an accident cannot be ruled out. Always dent
adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
Immediately after an accident, the following
road and weather conditions and maintain a
measures are implemented, depending on
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
the type and severity of the impact:
carefully.
Rby activating the hazard warning lamps
Function Rthe emergency lighting is activated
Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rthe front side windows are lowered
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
Rin vehicles with a memory function: the
BAS is activated
electrically adjustable steering wheel is
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
raised
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle Rthe engine is switched off
understeers or oversteers severely
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-
Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance
gency call
package: if BAS PLUS intervenes power-
fully or the radar sensor system detects an
imminent danger of collision in certain sit- Children in the vehicle
uations
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures Important safety notes
depending on the hazardous situation detec- If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft
ted: (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
Rthe seat belts are pre-tensioned. Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
closed so that only a small gap remains. cles. The child restraint system must be
Rvehicles with the memory function: the appropriate to the age, weight and size of
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an the child
unfavorable position. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
If the hazardous situation passes without safety notes in this section in addition to
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the child restraint system manufacturer's
the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by installation instructions
PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49)
X Move the seat backrest or seat back
slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.

Z
 58 Children in the vehicle

G WARNING A booster seat may be necessary to achieve

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- proper seat belt positioning for children over
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height
where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened
Rrelease the parking brake. properly without a booster seat.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
Safety

position P or shift manual transmission into

neutral. Special seat belt retractor
Rstart the engine.
G WARNING
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
child restraint system will no longer be
an accident and injury.
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
G WARNING
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
If persons, particularly children are subjected tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or the special seat belt retractor and secure the
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even child restraint system properly.
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. The seat belt on the front passenger side is
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
G WARNING When activated, the special seat belt retrac-
If the child restraint system is subjected to tor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- once the child seat is secured.
dren may burn themselves on these parts, Installing a child restraint system:
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
tions.
you, always ensure that the child restraint
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the belt
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child loop.
restraint system has been exposed to direct X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the Activating the special seat belt retractor:
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have While the seat belt is retracting, you should
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
ting properly. Particular attention must be belt retractor is enabled.
paid to children. X Push the child restraint system down so

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt that the seat belt is tight and does not
(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of loosen.
seat belts (Y page 44).
 Children in the vehicle 59

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat- sudden change in direction. The child

ing the special seat belt retractor: restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
X Make sure you observe the child restraint ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
system manufacturer's installation instruc- risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
tions. Always install child restraint systems prop-

Safety
X Press the belt buckle release button, hold erly, even if they are not being used. Make
the belt tongue and guide it back towards sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
the belt loop. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
ted. Further information on stowing objects, lug-
gage and loads securely can be found under
“Stowing options/stowage compartments”
(Y page 256).
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- G WARNING
tems is required by law in: Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjected
Rall 50 states to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rthe U.S. territories as intended. The child cannot then be
Rthe District of Columbia restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rall Canadian provinces braking or sudden changes of direction. There
You can obtain further information about the is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
correct child restraint system from any fatal.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
G WARNING accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
If the child restraint system is installed incor- ing systems on the child restraint system
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
intended. The child cannot then be restrained before you install a child restraint system
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or again.
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. If a child is carried on the front-passenger
Make sure that you observe the child restraint seat, be sure to observe the information on
system manufacturer's installation instruc- the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)"
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, (Y page 49). There you will also find informa-
that the base of the child restraint system is tion on deactivating the front-passenger front
always resting completely on the seat cush- air bag.
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
or behind the child restraint system. Only use lowing standards:
child restraint systems with the original cover RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
designed for them. Only replace damaged ards 213 and 225
covers with genuine covers. RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
G WARNING
Confirmation that the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
corresponds to the standards can be found
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
on an instruction label on the child restraint
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
system. This confirmation can also be found

Z
 60 Pets in the vehicle

in the installation instructions that are inclu- backrest of the child restraint system must,
ded with the child restraint system. as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- of the front-passenger seat. The child
rior and on the child restraint system. restraint system must not touch the roof or be
put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust
the angle of the seat backrest and the head
Safety

Child restraint system on the front- restraint position accordingly. Always make
passenger seat sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly
routed from the front-passenger seat belt
General notes loop to the shoulder belt guide on the child
If you secure a child in a child restraint system restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
on the front-passenger seat, be sure to must be routed forwards and downwards
observe the instructions and safety notes on from the front-passenger seat belt loop.
the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" Always observe the child restraint system
(Y page 49). manufacturer's installation and operating
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise instructions.
as a result of:
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the Pets in the vehicle
front-passenger seat
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
G WARNING
passenger front air bag
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- switches, for example.
board
As a result, they could:
Rearward-facing child restraint system Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear- Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
ward-facing child restraint system on the endangering other road users
front-passenger seat, always make sure that
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41)
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
and injury.
ted.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
Always observe the child restraint system
cle. Always secure animals properly during
manufacturer's installation and operating
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
instructions.
port box.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
 Driving safety systems 61

Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Overview of driving safety systems General information
In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
the following driving safety systems: that the wheels do not lock when you brake.

Safety
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
(Y page 61) cle when braking.
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62) The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
(Y page 62) running.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 63) Important safety notes
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
(Y page 67)
tion (Y page 61).
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 67)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67) G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
Important safety notes teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
If you fail to adapt your driving style or tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
become distracted, the driving safety sys- ding and accidents.
tems can neither reduce the risk of accident
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
nor override the laws of physics. Driving
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
safety systems are merely aids designed to
assist driving. You are responsible for the dis- When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed including driving safety systems, will also
and for braking in good time. Always adapt become inoperative. Observe the information
your driving style to suit the prevailing road on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 245) and
and weather conditions and maintain a safe display messages which may be shown in the
distance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- instrument cluster (Y page 213).
fully.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
i The driving safety systems described only (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
work as effectively as possible when there tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if
is adequate contact between the tires and you only brake gently.
the road surface. Please pay special atten-
tion to the notes on tires, recommended Braking
minimum tire tread depths, etc.
(Y page 310).
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
In wintry driving conditions, always use
uation is over.
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
X To make a full brake application:
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ing safety systems described in this section depress the brake pedal with full force.
work as effectively as possible. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.

Z
 62 Driving safety systems

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
tion of hazardous road conditions, and func- PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
tions as a reminder to take extra care while path of your vehicle for an extended period of
driving. time.
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
Safety

BAS (Brake Assist System) system is still available with complete brake
General information boosting effect and BAS.
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- a collision with a vehicle or reduce the effects
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a
BAS automatically boosts the braking force, danger of collision, you are assisted when
thus shortening the stopping distance. braking.

Important safety notes Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- G WARNING
tion (Y page 61).
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
G WARNING objects and complex traffic situations.
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
in an emergency braking situation is Rintervene unnecessarily
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
Rnot intervene
In an emergency braking situation, depress
There is a risk of an accident.
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Braking
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until G WARNING
the emergency braking situation is over. BAS PLUS does not react:
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Rto people or animals
The brakes will function as usual once you Rto oncoming vehicles
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
PLUS) critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
General information Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- uation and be ready to brake.
tion (Y page 61).
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equip- ognition can be impaired.
ped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor
system must be operational.
 Driving safety systems 63

Recognition by the radar sensor system is tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-
also impaired in the event of: ted simultaneously.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
ing the sensors emergency braking situation is over.
Rthere is interference by other radar sources ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Safety
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
example in parking garages tion as usual again, if:
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a Ryou release the brake pedal.
motorbike Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
relative to the center of your vehicle
vehicle.
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
cle, have the configuration and operation of
Ryou activate kickdown.
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
Function
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the tion (Y page 61).
brake force necessary if:
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
Ryou approach an obstacle, and i.e. power transmission between the tires and
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision the road surface.
When driving at a speed under 20 mph If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, from the direction desired by the driver, one
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
pressure will be carried out at the last possi- vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
ble moment. keep the vehicle on the desired course within
When driving at a speed above 20 mph physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
brake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-
fic situation. ETS (Electronic Traction System)
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
ardous situations with vehicles in front within i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and tion (Y page 61).
155 mph (250 km/h). ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to sta- they spin. This enables you to pull away and
tionary objects. Examples of stationary accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example
objects are stopped or parked vehicles. if the road surface is slippery on one side. In
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high addition, more drive torque is transferred to
braking force, preventative passenger pro- the wheel or wheels with traction.

Z
 64 Driving safety systems

ETS remains active when you deactivate Characteristics of ESP®

ESP®.
General information
i AMG vehicles: your vehicle may be
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
equipped with 20-inch tires on the rear
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
axle. If replaced with a 19-inch tire, ETS
active.
Safety

may intervene noticeably sooner for the

first few kilometers. After approximately If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
10 km ETS will function as usual again. lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
Information on the dimensions and types of If ESP® intervenes:
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be
found in the "Wheel/tire combinations"
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
section (Y page 337). stances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

Important safety notes necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
G WARNING ing road and weather conditions.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ECO start/stop function
ing safety systems are deactivated. This The ECO start/stop function switches the
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. engine off automatically when the vehicle
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a stops moving. The engine starts automati-
qualified specialist workshop. cally when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-
! When testing the electric parking brake tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before
on a braking dynamometer, switch off the the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP® deactivated when the engine is switched on
may otherwise destroy the brake system. again.
When towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised, observe the notes on Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
ESP®(Y page 305). AMG vehicles)
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp Important safety notes
in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ously when the engine is running.
tion (Y page 61).
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-
ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not You can select between the following states
available due to a malfunction. of ESP®:
Observe the information on warning lamps RESP® is activated.
(Y page 247) and display messages which RESP® is deactivated.
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 213). G WARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
i Only use wheels with the recommended
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
of skidding and an accident.
properly.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
 Driving safety systems 65

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
lowing situations: ting action for better traction on loose sur-
Rwhen
faces.
using snow chains
Rtraction control is still activated.
Rindeep snow
RESP® still provides support when you
Ron sand or gravel

Safety
brake.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- vehicles)
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
starts to spin. Important safety notes
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
extended period with ESP® deactivated. tion (Y page 61).
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. You can select between the following states
of ESP®:
Deactivating/activating ESP®
RESP® is activated.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
uations described in the following.

X To switch off: press button :. G WARNING

The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
instrument cluster lights up. bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
X To switch on: press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
instrument cluster goes out. bed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better to

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels ESP®:
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
Rwhen using snow chains
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
Rindeep snow
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
Ron sand or gravel
If you deactivate ESP®:
Ron designated roads when the vehicle's
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. own oversteering and understeering char-
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the acteristics are desired
drive wheels are able to spin.

Z
 66 Driving safety systems

Driving in SPORT handling mode or without Characteristics of activated SPORT han-

ESP® requires an extremely qualified and dling mode
experienced driver. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
Safety

otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a
cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel limited degree.
starts to spin. When SPORT handling mode is activated:
RESP® only improves driving stability to a
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP®deactivated. limited degree.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to a
limited degree and the drive wheels can
Deactivating/activating ESP® spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a
cutting action, which provides better grip.
RETS is still active.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
X To activate SPORT handling mode: If you deactivate ESP®:
briefly press button :. RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
The M SPORT handling mode warning Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. drive wheels are able to spin.
The SPORT handling mode message
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
appears in the multifunction display.
ting action for better traction on loose sur-
X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
faces.
briefly press button :. Rtraction control is still activated.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until intervenes.
the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it
in the instrument cluster.
is also not activated if you brake firmly and
The ÷ OFF message appears in the mul-
ESP® intervenes.
tifunction display.
RESP® still provides support when you
X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :.
brake.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷
ESP® ON message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
 Driving safety systems 67

EBD (electronic brake force distribu- For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-
tion) ing, the radar sensor system must be opera-
tional.
General information
With the help of the radar sensor system,
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that

Safety
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving are in front of your vehicle for an extended
stability while braking. period of time.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize
Important safety notes the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61). SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,
you will be warned visually and acoustically as
G WARNING well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can Brake cannot prevent a collision without your
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa- intervention.
ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style Important safety notes
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe- G WARNING
cialist workshop. PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a
Observe information regarding indicator and danger of collision is detected. There may be
warning lamps (Y page 245) as well as dis- a collision unless you also brake. Automatic
play messages (Y page 215). emergency braking cannot prevent a colli-
sion. There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
ADAPTIVE BRAKE take evasive action.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 61). G WARNING
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
also has the HOLD function (Y page 181) and Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
hill start assist (Y page 143). brake the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene

PRE-SAFE® Brake There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay particular attention to the traffic
General information situation and be ready to brake, especially if
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
tion (Y page 61). intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles In order to maintain the appropriate distance
with DISTRONIC PLUS. to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

Z
 68 Driving safety systems

G WARNING distance warning lamp will light up in the

instrument cluster.
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
Rto people or animals
or
Rto oncoming vehicles
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
Rto crossing traffic
Safety

so.
Rwhen cornering
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
automatically under the following conditions:
give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe driver and front-passenger have their
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- seat belts fastened
uation and be ready to brake. and
Rthe vehicle speed is between approx-
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph
ognition can be impaired. (200 km/h)
Recognition by the radar sensor system is At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
also impaired in the event of: (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else stationary objects. Examples of stationary
covering the sensors objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
Rthere is interference by other radar sources i If there is an increased risk of collision,
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for preventive passenger protection measures
example in parking garages (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
motorbike remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
relative to the center of your vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking,
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- up to the point of full brake application. Auto-
cle, have the configuration and operation of matic emergency braking is not performed
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- until immediately prior to an imminent acci-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- dent.
sions at low speeds where there is no visible You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
damage to the front of the vehicle. SAFE® Brake at any time by:
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
Function
Ractivating kickdown.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- Rreleasing the brake pedal.
tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
computer (Y page 203).
ended automatically if:
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
in the multifunction display. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in

this function warns you if you rapidly front of your vehicle.
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent
warning tone will then sound and the ·
 Protection against theft 69

Protection against theft A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:
Immobilizer
Ra door
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe trunk lid

Safety
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
Rthe hood
ignition off and open the driver's door.
Rthe glove box
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Rthe stowage space under the armrest
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
being started without the correct SmartKey. press the % or & button on the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The The alarm is switched off.
engine can be started by anyone with a valid or
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated The alarm is switched off.
when you start the engine. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
In the event that the engine cannot be star- grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), Key must be outside the vehicle.
the system is not operational. Contact an The alarm is switched off.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call or
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the Cus-
tomer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey vice.
or KEYLESS-GO. Rthe mbrace service has been activated
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys- properly.
tem is armed after approximately
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
15 seconds.
available.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

Z
70
 71

Useful information .............................. 72

SmartKey ............................................. 72
Doors .................................................... 78
Trunk .................................................... 80
Side windows ...................................... 83
Roof ...................................................... 87

Opening and closing

 72 SmartKey

Useful information cause the engine to be switched off. There is a

risk of an accident.
i This Operator's manual describes all Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
models and all standard and optional equip- SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
ment of your vehicle available at the time of inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
publication of the Operator's manual.
Country-specific differences are possible. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
Please note that your vehicle may not be magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
Opening and closing

equipped with all features described. This control function could be affected.
also applies to safety-related systems and Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
functions. vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
i Read the information on qualified special- Do not keep the SmartKey:
ist workshops (Y page 26). Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
SmartKey
foil
Important safety notes Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case

G WARNING This can affect the functionality of the

SmartKey.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other SmartKey functions
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
position P or shift manual transmission into
neutral.
Rstart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. : & To lock the vehicle
When leaving the vehicle, always take the ; F To unlock the trunk lid
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never = % To unlock the vehicle
leave children or animals unattended in the X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
ton.
reach of children.
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the Rthe vehicle is locked again.
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- Rthe theft deterrent locking system is
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could armed again.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
 SmartKey 73

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:

Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe stowage compartment in the center
console
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking

Opening and closing

and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
the on-board computer (Y page 207). surface of the door handle.
When it is dark, the surround lighting also X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-

comes on if it is activated in the on-board face :.

computer (Y page 206). X Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
ded period.
KEYLESS-GO Further information on the convenience
General notes closing feature (Y page 85).
X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by the trunk lid.
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.
LESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrally Changing the settings of the locking

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using system
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry You can change the settings of the locking
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the system. This means only the driver's door, the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con- lockable stowage compartments in the vehi-
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by cle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if
using the & button on the SmartKey. you frequently travel on your own.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, X To change the setting: press and hold
the distance between the key and the corre-
down the % and & buttons simulta-
sponding door handle must not be greater
neously for approximately six seconds until
than 3 ft (1 m).
the battery check lamp flashes twice
A check which periodically establishes a radio (Y page 75).
connection between the vehicle and the i If the setting of the locking system is
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- changed within the signal range of the vehi-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: cle, pressing the & or % button:
Rwhen the external door handles are Rlocks or
touched
Runlocks the vehicle
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion

Z
 74 SmartKey

The SmartKey now functions as follows: or

X To unlock the driver's door: press the X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
% button once. GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
vehicle.
ton twice. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
X To lock centrally: press the & button. key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
Opening and closing

lows: X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
Removing the mechanical key
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the front-passenger door handle.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
onds until the battery check lamp flashes
twice (Y page 75).

X Push release catch : in the direction of

Mechanical key the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
General notes
For further information about:
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 80)
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
Runlocking the trunk (Y page 82)
mechanical key.
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 80)
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered Inserting the mechanical key
(Y page 69). X Push mechanical key ; completely into
There are several ways to turn off the alarm: the SmartKey until it engages and release
X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: catch : is back in its basic position.
press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
or SmartKey battery
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Important safety notes
or
X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
G WARNING
GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni- Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
tion lock. The SmartKey must be in the ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
vehicle.
 SmartKey 75

severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal Replacing the battery

injury. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Key (Y page 74).
immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist

Opening and closing

workshop.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard-
ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until
battery compartment cover : opens. Do
not hold battery compartment cover :
closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 75).
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
pressing the & or % button:
to do so.
Rlocks or X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
Runlocks the vehicle free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-
cialist workshop. ment cover : into the housing and then
press to close it.

Z
 76 SmartKey

X Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart-

Key (Y page 74).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Opening and closing
 SmartKey 77

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if nec-
using the SmartKey. essary (Y page 75).
If this does not work:

Opening and closing

X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. To do this, hold the SmartKey as close as possible
to the vehicle and press the % or & button.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote

control function:
X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
Key. shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z
 78 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine can no lon- The on-board voltage is too low.
ger be started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing

(Y page 299).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine can no lon- The vehicle is locked.

ger be started using X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
KEYLESS-GO. The
SmartKey is in the vehi- There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
cle. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors Unlocking and opening doors from

the inside
Important safety notes
! The side windows will not open/close if
G WARNING the battery is discharged or if the side win-
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, dows have iced up. It will then not be pos-
they could: sible to close the door. Do not attempt to
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other force the door closed. You could otherwise
people or road users. damage the door or the side window.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. You can open a door from inside the vehicle
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. even if it has been locked.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in If the vehicle was previously locked with the
motion if, for example, they: SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the
vehicle from the inside will activate the anti-
Rrelease the parking brake. theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park (Y page 69).
position P or shift manual transmission into
neutral.
Rstart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
 Doors 79

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from

the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:

Opening and closing

Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking
button for the central locking, or
X Pull door handle ;. Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-
up. The door is unlocked and can be viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
opened. door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside
i When a door is opened, the side window is unlocked.
on that side opens slightly. When the door
is closed, the side window closes again.
Automatic locking feature
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. For example, you can unlock
the front-passenger door from the inside or
lock the vehicle before you pull away.

: Disarming
; Arming
X To disarm: press and hold button : for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To arm: press and hold button ; for about
five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To unlock: press button :. i If you press one of the two buttons and do
X To lock: press button ;. not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
If the front-passenger door is closed, the already been selected.
vehicle locks. The vehicle is locked automatically when the
The central locking/unlocking button does ignition is switched on and the wheels are
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the turning.
stowage compartment in the center console.

Z
 80 Trunk

You could therefore lock yourself out if: X Open the driver's door.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Close the front-passenger door and the
Rthe vehicle is being towed. trunk lid.
X Press the locking button (Y page 79).
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
X Check whether the locking knob on the
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board com- front-passenger door is still visible. Press
puter (Y page 207). the locking knob down by hand, if neces-
sary.
Opening and closing

X Close the driver's door.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
ical key) Key (Y page 74).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. the driver's door as far as it will go.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 69).
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 74).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To lock
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as
it will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
are locked.
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
as far as it will go to position 1. (Y page 74).
The door is unlocked.
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
it. theft alarm system is not armed.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 74).
Trunk

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Important safety notes

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the G WARNING

SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
 Trunk 81

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle G WARNING

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- The reversing feature does not react:
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
den change in direction.
gers
Always store objects so that they cannot be
Rover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closing
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
movement
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey. This means that the reversing feature cannot

Opening and closing

prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
! The trunk lid swings upwards when uations. There is a risk of injury.
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is Make sure that no body parts are in close
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. proximity during the closing procedure.
! Only close the trunk once the roof is low- If somebody becomes trapped:
ered completely. Otherwise, you could Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
damage the roof. Rpress the remote operating switch on the
If you close the trunk lid before the roof is driver's door, or
lowered completely, the loading aid switch Rpress the closing or locking button on the
lights up and a warning tone sounds. trunk lid, or
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid Rpull on the trunk lid handle
(Y page 353).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out. Opening/closing from outside
The trunk lid can be: Opening
Ropened/closed from outside
Ropened automatically from outside
Rlocked separately
Runlocked with the mechanical key
Ropened with the emergency release button

Trunk lid reversing feature

The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again X Pull handle :.
automatically. The automatic reversing func-
X Raise the trunk lid.
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for
your attentiveness to the trunk lid while it is
closing.

Z
 82 Trunk

Closing Locking the trunk separately

You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
remains locked and cannot be opened.
X Close the trunk lid.
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 74).
Opening and closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO.
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
will open again. 1 Basic position
2 To lock

Opening automatically from outside

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
General notes X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
position 1 to position 2.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
X Remove the mechanical key.
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 74).
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 353).
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
Opening
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
You can open the trunk lid automatically
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
using the handle in the trunk lid.
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
handle and let it go again immediately.
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing fea- cal key.
ture: the trunk lid can be also be opened If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
automatically using the SmartKey. open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
X Press and hold the F button on the will be triggered (Y page 69).
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 74).
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
 Side windows 83

The trunk lid emergency release does not

unlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-
nected or discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Opening and closing

1 Basic position Side windows
2 To unlock
Important safety notes
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go from position 1 to posi- G WARNING
tion 2. While opening the side windows, body parts
X Pull the trunk lid handle. could become trapped between the side win-
The trunk is unlocked. dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it. Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
(Y page 74).
pull the switch to close the side window again.
i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 80),
the trunk is also locked. G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
Trunk emergency release is a risk of injury.
You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside When closing make sure that no parts of the
with the emergency release button. body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

X Press emergency release button : briefly.

The trunk lid unlocks and opens. Side window reversing feature
The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk The front side windows are equipped with an
lid emergency release when the vehicle is automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
stationary or while driving. blocks or restricts one of the front side win-

Z
 84 Side windows

dows from traveling upwards during the auto- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
matic closing process, the side window opens ignition lock.
again automatically. During the manual clos- X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
ing process, the side window only opens responding button.
again automatically after the corresponding X To open fully: press the button beyond the
switch is released. However, the automatic
point of resistance and release it.
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
Automatic closing is started.
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
X To close manually: pull the corresponding
Opening and closing

attention when closing a side window.

button and hold it.
G WARNING X To close fully: pull the button beyond the
The reversing feature does not react: point of resistance and release it.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- Automatic closing is started.
gers X To interrupt automatic operation: press
Rwhile resetting or pull the corresponding switch again.
This means that the reversing feature cannot
i You can continue to operate the side win-
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
dows after you switch off the engine. This
uations. There is a risk of injury.
function is available for up to five minutes
Make sure that no body parts are in close or until the driver's or front-passenger door
proximity during the closing procedure. If is opened.
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing all side windows

Opening and closing the side win- Using the switch on the center console
dows in the front You can use the switch on the center console
The switches for the front side windows are to close all side windows simultaneously.
located on the driver's door. There is also a X Open the cover in the lower center console.
switch for the front-passenger side window The switch for all side windows is under the
on the front-passenger door. cover.
The switches on the driver's door take prec-
edence.

: Left
; Right
 Side windows 85

X To open all side windows: press X To open all side windows: press the %
switch : to the point of resistance. button on the SmartKey until the side win-
X To open all side windows fully: press dows are fully opened.
switch : beyond the point of resistance. X To interrupt the opening procedure:
All side windows open simultaneously. release the % button.
i If, after opening the windows, you then X To close all side windows: press the
close a side window using the switch on the & button on the SmartKey until the side
door control panel, the other side windows windows are fully closed.

Opening and closing

will remain open. To close the other side X To interrupt the closing procedure:
windows, you must pull the switch on the release the & button.
center console and hold it. The front side
window will close first, then the rear side Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO
windows.
X To close all side windows: pull switch :. G WARNING
The rear side windows close after the front When using the convenience closing feature,
side windows. parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-
X Make sure that all the side windows are ing area when a side window is being closed.
fully closed. There is a risk of injury.
i When the roof is open, only the two front Observe the complete closing procedure
side windows can be operated using the when the convenience closing feature is oper-
switch on the center console. ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Using the SmartKey If someone is trapped:
G WARNING X Release the recessed sensor surface on the
When using the convenience closing feature, door handle immediately.
parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- X Pull the door handle immediately and hold
ing area when a side window is being closed. it until the side windows open again.
There is a risk of injury.
With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-
Observe the complete closing procedure dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key
when the convenience closing feature is oper- must be outside the vehicle. All the doors
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in must be closed.
close proximity during the closing procedure.

If someone is trapped:
X Release the & button immediately.
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows open again.
You can use the SmartKey to open or close all
side windows simultaneously.
X Close the roof (Y page 88).
X Open the trunk partition (Y page 89).
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.

Z
 86 Side windows

XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
sor surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
Opening and closing

release recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle.

Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed. (Y page 84)
X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 84).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly. If
this is not the case, repeat the steps above
again.
 Roof 87

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release

Opening and closing

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Roof Only have the soft top closed manually at a

qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G WARNING ! Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavy
objects there. You will otherwise damage
If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the
the roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.
soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short
time. This causes the soft top to lower unex- ! Do not forget that the weather can
pectedly and may cause you or others to be change abruptly. Make certain that the roof
trapped. There is a risk of injury. is closed when you leave the vehicle. The
Always open or close the soft top completely. vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
G WARNING ! When opening and closing the roof, make
Closing the roof manually is a complicated sure that:
and technically demanding procedure, which
requires a lot of strength. You or others can
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Z
 88 Roof

Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roof Opening and closing

swings upwards.
Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the
vehicle, as the trunk lid swings back-
wards beyond the bumper.
Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the
trunk partition.
Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by
Opening and closing

the load.
Rthe trunk partition is closed.
Rthe trunk lid is closed.
Rthe outside temperature is above 5 ‡
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Ò15 †). (Y page 161).
You could otherwise damage the roof, X Close the trunk partition (Y page 90).
trunk and other parts of the vehicle.
X Close the trunk lid.
i Vehicle dimensions when opening/clos- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
ing the roof (Y page 353). tion lock.
i Make sure that the roof and rear window X Open the cover in the lower center console.
are clean and dry before opening the roof. Roof switch : is located under the cover.
Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the X To open: pull roof switch : until the entire
vehicle interior or trunk. roof is stowed away in the trunk.
The Vario-Roof in Operation message
appears in the multifunction display. Once
Opening and closing using the roof the opening procedure is complete, the
switch message disappears and a tone will sound.
Important safety notes All of the side windows open.
X To close: press and hold roof switch :
G WARNING until the roof is fully closed.
When opening or closing the roof, body parts The Vario-Roof in Operation message
could be trapped by, for example, the roof appears in the multifunction display. Once
mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There the opening procedure is complete, the
is a risk of injury. message disappears and a tone will sound.
When raising or lowering the roof, make sure All of the side windows open.
that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving X To close all side windows, pull the switch
components. If someone becomes trapped, under the cover of the center console
release the button. (Y page 84).
i If you operate the roof switch and the
Trunk Partition Open message appears
in the multifunction display, the trunk par-
tition has not been closed correctly.
 Roof 89

Opening and closing using the Smart- Locking the roof again
Key
Important safety notes
Important safety notes
G WARNING
G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the
When opening or closing the roof, body parts soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short
could be trapped by, for example, the roof time. This causes the soft top to lower unex-
mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There pectedly and may cause you or others to be

Opening and closing

is a risk of injury. trapped. There is a risk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make sure Always open or close the soft top completely.
that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving
components. If someone becomes trapped, The roof is not locked if:
release the button. Rthe K symbol and the Vario-Roof in
Operation message appear in the multi-
Opening and closing function display.
Rthe K symbol and the Open/Close
X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).
Vario-Roof Completely message
X Close the trunk lid (Y page 80). appear and you hear a warning tone.
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
Ryou hear a warning tone for up to 10 sec-
door handle. onds when pulling away or while driving.
X To open: press and hold the % button
on the SmartKey until the roof is fully Locking
opened.
The roof and the rear side windows open. You can lock the roof again if it is not locked
The front side windows close. fully.
X To interrupt the opening procedure: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon
release the % button. as possible, paying attention to road and
X To open the front side windows: press traffic conditions.
and hold the % button on the SmartKey X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
again. 2 in the ignition lock.
X To close: press and hold the & button X Press the roof switch (Y page 88).
on the SmartKey until the roof is fully
closed.
The roof and the side windows close. Trunk partition
X To interrupt the closing procedure:
General notes
release the & button.
i When the roof is closed and the trunk par- ! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage
tition is open, the roof cannot be opened when folding back the roof, you should:
using the SmartKey functions. Instead, all Ronly load the trunk to below the trunk
of the side windows open or close simulta- partition
neously (Y page 84). Additionally, the Rnot place any objects on or in front of the
Trunk Partition Open message appears trunk partition
in the multifunction display.

Z
 90 Roof

Rnot place any objects on the cover G WARNING

behind the roll bars If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it
Rnot allow the cargo to push the trunk could detach itself during a journey and
partition upwards endanger other road users. There is a risk of
The trunk partition can be used to cover lug- an accident and injury.
gage and loads in the trunk. Install the wind screen as described.

Opening and closing ! Install or remove the wind screen only

Opening and closing

when the roof is open. You could otherwise

damage the wind screen or the vehicle inte-
rior.
The wind screen offers protection from the
wind when driving with the roof down.
The wind screen can be installed or removed
from the driver's side or passenger side.
For operations involving the wind screen, it is
preferable to be positioned on the side of the
vehicle facing away from the traffic, after
stopping the vehicle in accordance with the
X To close: pull back trunk partition : by traffic conditions.
the handle in the direction of the arrow until
it engages on both sides in the eyelets on Installing and removing the wind screen
the cargo compartment lip.
X To open: grip the handle of trunk parti-
Preparing for installation
tion :.
X Press the release button in the handle of
trunk partition :.
Trunk partition : is unlocked.
X Pull trunk partition : up out of the eyelets
on the cargo compartment lip.
X Push trunk partition : forwards against
the direction of the arrow by handle.

Wind screen Preparing for installation from the left side of the
vehicle (example)
Important safety notes : Wind screen
G WARNING ; Locked latch
If you use the wind screen in darkness or in = Unlocked latch
other conditions offering poor visibility, your X The following conditions must be fulfilled
view to the rear is further impaired. There is a for installation:
risk of an accident.
Only use the wind screen when visibility con-
ditions are good.
 Roof 91

Runlocking buttons R and L point in the Removing

direction of travel.
Rlatch = facing you is unlocked.
Rlatch ; facing away from you is locked.
X To unlock the latch: press unlocking but-
ton R or L on the locked latch.
X To lock the latch: push the unlocked latch

Opening and closing

upwards by hand until it engages.

Installing

Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam-

ple)
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions.
X Press unlocking button L :. Meanwhile,
pull wind screen ; on the side of the vehi-
cle facing you upwards and tilt it.

Installation from the left side of the vehicle (exam-

ple)
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions.
X Take the wind screen out of the trunk.
X Prepare for installing (Y page 90).
X Hold wind screen : at an angle and slide it
with locked latch ; in the direction of
arrow ? into the bracket of the opposite Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam-
roll bar. ple)
X Press wind screen : on the side of the X Pull wind screen ; out of the bracket of
vehicle facing you downwards in the direc- the opposite roll bar in the direction of the
tion of arrow A until it engages. arrow.
Make sure that studs B and latch = fit X Secure wind screen ; to the trunk floor by
into the respective brackets. the rubber strips (Y page 258).
X Check whether wind screen : is fully
inserted into all four brackets and is sitting
securely. AIRGUIDE
X If this is not the case, remove wind
screen : again and repeat the steps Important safety notes
above.
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle if you fold
AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is in
motion. There is a risk of an accident.

Z
 92 Roof

Only fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is MAGIC SKY CONTROL
stationary.
General notes
! AIRGUIDE can only be positioned cor- MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the
rectly by folding it in or out. AIRGUIDE can- transparency of which can be changed by
not be dismantled. Do not try to remove applying electrical voltage.
AIRGUIDE from its anchorage. Otherwise,
MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched
you could damage AIRGUIDE or the vehicle.
between darkened and transparent states.
Opening and closing

AIRGUIDE can be folded out or back in from

the driver's side or passenger side. i MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automat-
ically when you turn the SmartKey to posi-
When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably stand tion 0 in the ignition lock or remove the
on the side of the vehicle away from the traf-
SmartKey.
fic, after you have stopped the vehicle in
accordance with road and traffic conditions.
Risk of electric shock
Operating AIRGUIDE G DANGER
MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high
voltage. If the trim behind the overhead con-
trol panel is damaged or removed, electrical
components will be exposed. If you touch
these components, you could get an electric
shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.
RNever remove the trim behind the overhead
control panel.
RIf the trim is damaged, never touch the
electrical components behind it.
RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON-
Example: folding out from the left side of the vehi-
cle TROL carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. The electrical components of MAGIC SKY
X To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc : in the CONTROL are protected by a paneling behind
direction of the arrow towards the middle of the overhead control panel.
the vehicle to the stop. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is
X Repeat with disc ;. marked with a yellow warning sticker that
X To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs : and ; warns you of high voltage. The electric cables
back behind the roll bar to the stop. of the high-voltage section are colored
orange.
i Discs : and ; can also be used inde-
pendently of each other, e.g. when you are
driving without a passenger.
 Roof 93

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

Opening and closing

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta-
tus it was set to before the engine was
switched off.
X To change the degree of transparency:
press button :.
i At sub-zero temperatures, the change is
slower and uneven. The entire process may
take some time.

Z
 94 Roof

Problems with the roof

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The roof will not open or The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged.
close. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 90).

The trunk lid is open.

Opening and closing

X Close the trunk lid (Y page 81).

The on-board voltage is too low.

X Leave the engine running.

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The
roof drive has been automatically deactivated.
You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten
minutes.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

The automatic roof mechanism is faulty.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 95

Useful information .............................. 96

Correct driver's seat position ............ 96
Seats .................................................... 97
Steering wheel .................................. 100
Mirrors ............................................... 103
Memory function .............................. 106

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

 96 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost

vertical position
i This Operator's manual describes all Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
models and all standard and optional equip- your thighs are gently supported
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Ryou can depress the pedals properly
publication of the Operator's manual. X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
Country-specific differences are possible. ted properly.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
When doing so, make sure that you have
equipped with all features described. This
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
also applies to safety-related systems and
of your head is supported at eye level by the
functions.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

center of the head restraint.

i Read the information on qualified special- X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
ist workshops (Y page 26). wheel adjustment (Y page 100).
X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Correct driver's seat position
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 101)
Adjusts the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 101)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 42).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 44).
The seat belt should:
X Observe the safety guidelines on seat Rfit snugly across your body
adjustment (Y page 97).
Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul-
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-
der
erly.
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98) joints
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98) X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
When adjusting the seat, make sure that: ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) in
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag such a way that you have a good view of
as possible road and traffic conditions.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position X Vehicles with a memory function: save

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings (Y page 106).
 Seats 97

Seats G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
Important safety notes
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
G WARNING as intended. There is an increased risk of
Children could become trapped if they adjust injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
the seats, particularly when unattended. event of an accident or when braking.
There is a risk of injury. Always drive with the head restraints instal-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the led. Before driving off, make sure for every
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never vehicle occupant that the center of the head
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. restraint supports the back of the head at

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

about eye level.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
G WARNING
the following while driving:
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" mirrors and fasten your seat belt before start-
(Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle" ing the engine.
(Y page 57).
G WARNING ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
motion. This could cause you to lose control of liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. soon as possible.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

engaged before starting the engine. switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
G WARNING the seats.
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

other vehicle occupants could be trapped and see the "Interior care" section.
thereby injured. Children in particular could Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
risk of injury. The seats should only be occupied by
While moving the seats, make sure that your passengers, if possible.
hands or other body parts do not get under the Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- not cover the seats with insulating mate-
tem. rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
Z
 98 Seats

moving the seats back. There is a risk that Adjusting the seats electrically
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
i The head restraints are installed with the
NECK-PRO system (Y page 56). For this
reason, it is not possible to remove the
head restraints from the seats.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the seats manually

: Backrest angle
; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
= Seat cushion angle
? Seat height
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 106).

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually
X To set seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift
lever : and slide the seat forwards or
backwards.
X Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
X To adjust the backrest angle: relieve the
pressure on the backrest.
X Pull handle ; and adjust the backrest to
the desired angle.
X Release handle ; again. X To raise/lower: push the head restraint
The backrest must audibly engage. upwards or pull it down into the desired
X To adjust the seat height: pull handle = position.
upwards or push it down repeatedly until
the seat has reached the desired height.
 Seats 99

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Driver's and front-passenger seat

: To raise the backrest contour The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
? To harden the backrest contour
eight minutes.
You can adjust the contour of the seat backr- The system automatically switches down
ests individually to provide optimum support from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
for your back. minutes.
The system automatically switches off
Switching the seat heating on/off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
Activating/deactivating X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
G WARNING
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to until the desired heating level is set.
become very hot. The health of persons with X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited until all the indicator lamps go out.
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer Problems with the seat heating
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
The seat heating has switched off prema-
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
repeatedly.
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window
defroster or interior lighting.
X Once the battery is sufficiently charged,
switch on the seat heating again.

Z
100 Steering wheel

AIRSCARF Problems with AIRSCARF

Activating/deactivating AIRSCARF has switched off prematurely or
will not switch on. The vehicle's electrical sys-
G WARNING tem voltage is too low because too many
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air electrical consumers are switched on.
can flow from the vents in the head restraints. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
This could result in burns in the immediate not need, such as the rear window
vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. defroster or interior lighting.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes X Switch on AIRSCARF again.
too hot.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt

The AIRSCARF function warms the head and There is a risk of an accident.
neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
The warm air flows out of the holes in the head ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
restraints. before starting the engine.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected. G WARNING
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
2 in the ignition lock. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
X To switch on: press button :.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
Three red indicator lamps in the button light
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
up. The blower starts up after a preheating
phase of seven seconds.
G WARNING
X Press button : repeatedly until the
Children could injure themselves if they
desired heating level is set.
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
injury.
until all the indicator lamps go out.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
i The blower continues running for seven SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
seconds to cool down the heating ele- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
ments.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF still be adjusted when there is no key in the
may switch off. ignition lock.
 Steering wheel 101

Adjusting the steering wheel man- i Further related subjects:

ually REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 101)
RStoring settings (Y page 106)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G WARNING

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
: Release lever control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
; To adjust the steering wheel height
accident.
= To adjust the steering wheel position Always wait until the adjustment process is
(fore-and-aft adjustment) complete before driving off.

X Push release lever : down completely in G WARNING

the direction of the arrow. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
The steering column is unlocked. the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired occupants – particularly children – could
position. become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Push release lever : up completely. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
The steering column is locked. ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
X Check if the steering column is locked. any body parts in the sweep of the steering
When doing so, try to push the steering wheel.
wheel up or down or try to move it in the If somebody becomes trapped:
fore-and-aft direction.
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-
Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
cally ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
: To adjust the steering wheel height any body parts in the sweep of the seat and
; To adjust the steering wheel position the steering wheel.
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
Z
102 Steering wheel

If somebody becomes trapped: Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons, or The steering wheel is moved to the last selec-
Rpress one of the memory function memory ted position when:
buttons, or Rthe driver's door is closed
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition
ment in the opposite direction to that in lock
which the steering wheel is moving or
The adjustment process is stopped. Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

G WARNING
When you close the driver's door with the
If you use openings in the bodywork or ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
detachable parts as steps, you could: also automatically moved to the previously
Rslip and/or fall set position.
Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to The last position of the steering wheel is
fall. stored when you switch off the ignition or
There is a risk of injury. when you store the setting with the memory
Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita- function (Y page 106).
ble ladder.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
in and out of your vehicle easier. triggered in an accident, the steering column
You can activate and deactivate the EASY- will move upwards when the driver's door is
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com- opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
puter (Y page 207). tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue
Position of the steering wheel when the the occupants.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
The steering wheel swings upwards when only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
you: ture is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 207).
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in
position 1
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is
in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
 Mirrors 103

Mirrors
Rear-view mirror

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
forwards or back. rior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
Exterior mirrors The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
Adjusting the exterior mirrors mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
G WARNING
X Press adjustment button = up, down, to
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
image. Visible objects are actually closer than the right or to the left.
they appear. This means that you could mis- The exterior mirror must be set to a position
judge the distance from road users traveling that provides you with a good overview of
behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a traffic conditions.
risk of an accident. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
For this reason, always make sure of the field of vision.
actual distance from the road users traveling The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
behind by glancing over your shoulder. after starting the vehicle if the rear window
defroster is switched on and the outside tem-
G WARNING perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger minutes.
side reduces the size of the image. Visible i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
objects are actually closer than they appear. manually by switching on the rear window
This means that you could misjudge the dis- defroster.
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Z
104 Mirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out button : until you hear a click and then the
electrically mirrors engage in position (Y page 104).
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte

is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
There is a risk of injury.
X Briefly press button :.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. observe the following:
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
always folded out fully while driving. They immediately with water.
could otherwise vibrate. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
automatically rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function induce vomiting.
is activated in the on-board computer RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
(Y page 208): skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as attention immediately.
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- RImmediately change out of clothing which
side. has come into contact with electrolyte.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat- RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and attention immediately.
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if they glare mode if the following conditions are met
have been folded in manually. simultaneously:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of sensor in the rear-view mirror.
position, proceed as follows:
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
X Vehicles without electrically folding reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror ing is switched on.
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding
 Mirrors 105

Parking position for the exterior mir- Using the memory button
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you 2 in the ignition lock.
engage reverse gear. You can store this posi- X With the exterior mirror on the front-
tion. passenger side activated, use adjustment
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
ignition lock. curb should be visible.
X Press memory button M ? and one of the
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side. arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
X Engage reverse gear.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
mirror does not move.
side moves to the preset parking position.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
the steps.
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored. Calling up a stored parking position set-
ting
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi-
tion.

Z
106 Memory function

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
tion lock. becomes trapped, immediately release the
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- memory function position button. The adjust-
passenger side using button ;. ment process is stopped.
X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger G WARNING
side moves to the stored parking position. Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
side moves back to its original position:
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never

(15 km/h) leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side

Memory function
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
X Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 98).
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 101) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 103).
G WARNING
X Press memory button M and one of the
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
pants – particularly children – could become three seconds.
trapped. There is a risk of injury. The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
While the memory function is making adjust-
tings have been completed.
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memory function position Calling up a stored setting
button. The adjustment process is stopped. XPress and hold the relevant storage posi-
tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
G WARNING wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
When the memory function adjusts the seat, position.
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly i The setting procedure is interrupted as
children – could become trapped. There is a soon as you release the storage position
risk of injury. button.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
 107

Useful information ............................ 108

Exterior lighting ................................ 108
Interior lighting ................................. 113
Replacing bulbs ................................. 114
Windshield wipers ............................ 117

Lights and windshield wipers

108 Exterior lighting

Useful information Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options
i This Operator's manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using:
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch
publication of the Operator's manual.
Rthe combination switch (Y page 110)
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 205)
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch
functions.
Operation
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 26).
Lights and windshield wipers

Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps
gations. 2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
Symmetrical low-beam headlamps led by the light sensor
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
beam in countries in which traffic drives on B R Rear fog lamp
the opposite side of the road from the country C N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents fog lamps)
glare to oncoming traffic. When using sym- If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
metrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
as widely and as far ahead as normal.
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as The exterior lighting (except the parking/
possible before driving in these countries. standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
Asymmetrical low beam Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

Have the headlamps converted back to asym- Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in

metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified position 0.

specialist workshop as soon as possible after
crossing the border again.
 Exterior lighting 109

Automatic headlamp mode turn the light switch to T, the daytime

G WARNING running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- If the engine is running and you turn the light
beam headlamps may not be switched on switch to L, the manual settings take
automatically if there is fog, snow or other precedence over the daytime running lamps.
causes of poor visibility due to the weather USA only:
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an The daytime running lamps improve the visi-
accident. bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
In such situations, turn the light switch to the daytime running lamps function must be
L. switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 205).
The automatic headlamp feature is only an If the engine is running and you turn the light
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's switch to T or L, the manual settings

Lights and windshield wipers

lighting at all times. take precedence over the daytime running
à is the favored light switch setting. The lamps.
light setting is automatically selected accord-
Low-beam headlamps
ing to the brightness of the ambient light
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con- G WARNING
ditions such as fog, snow or spray): When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: beam headlamps may not be switched on
the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically if there is fog, snow or other
automatically depending on the brightness causes of poor visibility due to the weather
of the ambient light. conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
RWith the engine running: if you have acti-
vated the daytime running lamps function In such situations, turn the light switch to
via the on-board computer, the daytime L.
running lamps or the low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
and parking lamps are switched on or off
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
automatically depending on the brightness
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
of the ambient light.
switched on and the light switch is set to the
X To switch on automatic headlamp
L position. This is a particularly useful
mode: turn the light switch to Ã. function in the event of rain and fog.
Only for Canada: X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
The daytime running lamps improve the visi- turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- position 2 or start the engine.
time running lamps function is required by law X Turn the light switch to L.
in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
When the engine is running and the vehicle is ment cluster lights up.
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running Front fog lamps
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after In conditions where visibility is poor due to
three minutes. fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis-
When the engine is running, the vehicle is ibility as well as making it easier for other road
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you users to see you. They can be operated
together with the parking lamps or together

Z
110 Exterior lighting

with the parking lamps and low-beam head- X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
lamps. The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn ment cluster lights up.
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
Standing lamps
2 or start the engine.
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
X Press the N button.
ted.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
ment cluster lights up.
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
X To switch off the front fog lamps: press
position 0.
the N button.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
Lights and windshield wipers

ment cluster goes out.

the vehicle).
Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the
fog lamps function.
Rear fog lamp Combination switch
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your Turn signal
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
lamps.
X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
: High-beam headlamps
R button. ; Turn signal, right
The yellow R indicator lamp in the = High-beam flasher
instrument cluster goes out. ? Turn signal, left

Parking lamps
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
! If the battery has been excessively dis- direction of arrow ; or ?.
charged, the parking lamps or standing The corresponding turn signal flashes three
lamps are automatically switched off to times.
enable the next engine start. Always park
X To indicate: press the combination switch
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the beyond the pressure point in the direction
continuous use of the T parking lamps of arrow ; or ?.
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
 Exterior lighting 111

High-beam headlamps only the turn signal lamp on the corre-

sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine. press button :.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. The hazard warning lamps automatically
X Press the combination switch beyond the
switch on if:
pressure point in the direction of arrow :. Ran air bag is deployed or
In the à position, the high-beam head- Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
lamps are only switched on when it is dark speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
and the engine is running. comes to a standstill
The K indicator lamp in the instrument The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
cluster lights up when the high-beam head- matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of

Lights and windshield wipers

lamps are switched on. above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
X To switch off the high-beam head- brake application.
lamps: move the combination switch back
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
to its normal position. the ignition is switched off.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Cornering light function
High-beam flasher
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

The cornering light function improves the illu-

mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-
ing light function can only be activated when
the low-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: turn the steering wheel
press button :. Rif you are driving at speeds between
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
turn signal using the combination switch, and turn the steering wheel

Z
112 Exterior lighting

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short beam automatically. The system recognizes
time, but is automatically switched off after vehicles with their lights on, either approach-
no more than three minutes. ing from the opposite direction or traveling in
front of your vehicle, and consequently
switches the headlamps from high beam to
Active light function low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-
beam headlamp range depending on the dis-
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
tivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
Lights and windshield wipers

panel.

Important safety notes

The active light function is a system that G WARNING

moves the headlamps according to the steer- Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
ing movements of the front wheels. In this road users:
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
driving. This allows you to identify pedes- Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
trians, cyclists and animals.
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
Active: when the lights are switched on.
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
Adaptive Highbeam Assist have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic high-
General notes beam headlamps will not be deactivated or
activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
You can use this function to set the head- Rdirton the sensors or the sensors are
lamps to change between low beam and high obscured
 Interior lighting 113

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Interior lighting

on/off
Overview of interior lighting
X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
tion display lights up when it is dark and the
light sensor activates the low-beam head-
lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically

Lights and windshield wipers

depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users. Overhead control panel
If you are driving at speeds above approx- : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other on/off
road users have been detected: ; | Switches the automatic interior
The high-beam headlamps are switched on lighting control on/off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in = p Switches the right-hand reading
the instrument cluster also lights up. lamp on/off
If you are driving at speeds below approx- ? c Switches the interior lighting on/off
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road
users have been detected or the roads are
adequately lit: Interior lighting control
The high-beam headlamps are switched off General notes
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _ In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
indicator lamp in the multifunction display discharging, the interior lighting functions are
remains lit. automatically deactivated after some time
X To switch off: move the combination unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
switch back to its normal position or move ignition lock.
the light switch to another position. The color and brightness of the ambient light-
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- ing may be set using the on-board computer
tion display goes out. (Y page 205).

Automatic interior lighting control

Headlamps fogged up on the inside X To activate/deactivate: press the |
Certain climatic and physical conditions may button.
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This When the automatic interior lighting con-
moisture does not affect the functionality of trol is activated, the button is flush with the
the headlamp. overhead control panel.

Z
114 Replacing bulbs

The interior lighting automatically switches If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
on if you: you can recognize this by the following: the
Runlock the vehicle cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
from the top to the bottom and back again
Ropen a door
when you start the engine. For this to be
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
observed, the lights must be switched on
The interior light is activated for a short while before starting the engine.
when the SmartKey is removed from the igni- Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
tion lock. You can activate this delayed vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
switch-off using the on-board computer that these function correctly at all times.
(Y page 206). Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Manual interior lighting control Other bulbs

Lights and windshield wipers

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:

G WARNING
press the c button.
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
press the p button.
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
changing a bulb.
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
X To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard The bulb may explode if:
warning lamp button. Ryou touch it
or Rit is hot
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the Ryou drop it
SmartKey. Ryou scratch it
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
Replacing bulbs bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Important safety notes
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
Xenon bulbs life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
G DANGER glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
an electric shock if you remove the cover of Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. with liquids.
Never touch the parts or the electrical con- There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on that you cannot replace. Replace only the
the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe- bulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs that
cialist workshop. you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
 Replacing bulbs 115

If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-

sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

Tail lamp
: Backup lamp: W 16 W

Lights and windshield wipers

Changing the front bulbs
Removing/mounting the cover in the
front wheel housing

Halogen headlamps
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

X To remove: switch off the lights.

X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Slide cover : up and remove it.
X To install: insert cover : again and slide
down until it engages.

Bi-Xenon headlamps
: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Z
116 Replacing bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head- X Switch off the lights.

lamps) X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,
disconnect it and pull it out of bulb
holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;,
push it down and secure it in place.
X Attach housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
Lights and windshield wipers

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous- Side marker lamps (halogen head-
ing (Y page 115). lamps)
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
and pull it out. side marker lamp changed at a qualified spe-
X Press retainer ; up. cialist workshop.
X Remove connector = with the bulb.
X Pull the bulb out of connector =.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
X Insert the new bulb into connector = and
into bracket for retainer ;.
Make sure the bulb is positioned correctly.
X Press retainer ; down.
X Attach housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-
ing (Y page 115).

High-beam headlamps (halogen head-

X Switch off the lights.
lamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenon
headlamps) X Open the hood.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
 Windshield wipers 117

Changing the rear bulbs Windshield wipers

Backup lamp Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the wind-

Lights and windshield wipers

shield wipers.
X Switch off the lights.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
X Make sure that the roof is closed.
the windshield after the vehicle has been
X Open the trunk.
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
X Turn and pull out buffer stop ;. other residues may be the reason for this.
X Unclip catch : for side paneling =. Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
X Reach upwards into side paneling =,
loosen and pull downwards until holder ?
of the backup lamp is easily accessible.
X Pull out bulb holder ?.
X Pull out the bulb.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ?.
X Insert holder ? until it engages.
X re-install side paneling = precisely.
X Clip in catch : for side paneling =.
X Push in and tighten buffer stop ;.
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)

Z
118 Windshield wipers

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor windshield may be damaged by the force of
set to high sensitivity) the impact.
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast the wiper blades changed at a qualified
B í Single wipe/î To wipe the wind- specialist workshop.
shield using washer fluid ! Always position the windshield wiper
X Switch on the ignition. arms vertically before folding them away
X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
from the windshield. By doing so, you will
sponding position. avoid damage to the hood.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate Replacing the wiper blades

wiping frequency is set automatically accord-
ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å Removing the wiper blades
Lights and windshield wipers

position, the rain sensor is more sensitive X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
than in the Ä position, causing the wind- ignition lock (Y page 139).
shield wipers to wipe more frequently.
X Set the windshield wipers to position °.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
tical position, turn the SmartKey to position
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
0 and remove it from the ignition lock
tions, thereby causing an accident.
(Y page 139).
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
Replacing the wiper blades the windshield.

Important safety notes

G WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper X Press both release clips ;.
arm of the wiper. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield. arrow A.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
 Windshield wipers 119

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade : with recess B

Lights and windshield wipers

on lug A.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.

Z
120 Windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
Lights and windshield wipers

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the center of the wind-
shield.
 121

Useful information ............................ 122

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 122
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 127
Setting the air vents ......................... 134

Climate control
122 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most par-

ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
i This Operator's manual describes all ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
models and all standard and optional equip- lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces
ment of your vehicle available at the time of the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
publication of the Operator's manual. interior. For this reason, you should always
Country-specific differences are possible. observe the interval for replacing the filter,
Please note that your vehicle may not be which is specified in the Maintenance
equipped with all features described. This Booklet. As it depends on environmental
also applies to safety-related systems and conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
functions. interval may be shorter than stated in the
Maintenance Booklet.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 26).
Climate control

Overview of climate control systems

General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 133).
i When the weather is warm, ventilate the
vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired vehicle
interior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
 Overview of climate control systems 123

Air-conditioning system control panel

Climate control
Canada only
: To set the temperature (Y page 129)
; To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 133)
= To set the air distribution (Y page 130)
? To defrost the windshield (Y page 131)
A To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
B To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)
C To set the airflow (Y page 130)
D To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

USA only
: To set the temperature (Y page 129)
; To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 131)
124 Overview of climate control systems

= To set the air distribution (Y page 130)

? To defrost the windshield (Y page 131)
A To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
B To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)
C To set the airflow (Y page 130)
D To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

Notes on using the air-conditioning

system
Air-conditioning system
Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use the air-
conditioning system optimally.
Climate control

RSwitch on cooling with air dehumidification

using the ¿ button. The indicator lamp
in the ¿ button lights up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
R Recommendation for air distribution in
winter: set the O and ¯ settings.
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: set the P setting.
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require full climate
control capacity, the ECO start/stop function
can be deactivated by pressing the ECO but-
ton (Y page 147).
 Overview of climate control systems 125

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
Canada only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 129)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 131)
= To switch the ZONE function on/off
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 133)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 129)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 130)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 130)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 130)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 127)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 129)
126
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

USA only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 129)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 131)
= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 131)
? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 129)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 130)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 130)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 130)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 127)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 129)

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
climate control tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
The following contains instructions and rec- if there are unpleasant outside odors or
ommendations to enable you to get the most when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
out of your automatic climate control. erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RActivate climate control using the à and
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
¿ buttons or the Á button on the
control panel of the climate control. The perature settings on the driver's side for
indicator lamps in the à and ¿ but- the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
tons or the Á button light up. cator lamp in the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want to
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual
 Operating the climate control systems 127

heat function can only be activated or deac- Dual-zone automatic climate control
tivated with the ignition switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 139).
ECO start/stop function
X To switch on: press the à button.
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- The indicator lamp in the à button lights
mate control only operates at a reduced capa- up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
city. If you require full climate control capa- automatic mode.
city, the ECO start/stop function can be or
deactivated by pressing the ECO button
X Press the ^ button.
(Y page 147).
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
Operating the climate control sys- restored.
tems X To switch off: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
Switching climate control on/off up.

Climate control
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the Activating/deactivating cooling with
air supply and air circulation are also air dehumidification
switched off. The windows could fog up.
Therefore, switch off climate control only General notes
briefly If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
i Activate climate control primarily using midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
the à button (Y page 129). cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
Air-conditioning system dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- tion function only briefly.
tion lock (Y page 139). The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
X To activate: turn airflow control C clock- tion is only available when the engine is run-
wise to the desired position (except posi- ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
tion 0) (Y page 123). dehumidified according to the temperature
X To deactivate: turn airflow control C selected.
counter-clockwise to position Condensation may drip from the underside of
0(Y page 123). the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
tion.
128 Operating the climate control systems

Activating/deactivating
X To activate: press the ¿ or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á
button lights up.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á
button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á
button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function has a delayed switch-
off feature.
Climate control
 Operating the climate control systems 129

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿/Á button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The "Cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation" function cannot
be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the

_ button.
General notes or

Climate control
Automatic mode is only available with 2-zone X Press the I or K button.
automatic air conditioning. The indicator lamp in the à button goes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is out.
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and Setting the temperature
the air distribution.
Air-conditioning system
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
function is activated. If necessary, cooling tion lock (Y page 139).
with air dehumidification can be deactivated. X To increase/reduce: turn control :
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- clockwise or counter-clockwise
midification" function, the air inside the vehi- (Y page 123).
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- Only change the temperature setting in
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-
i If you turn control : counter-clockwise
to the lowest temperature setting, air-recir-
tion function only briefly.
culation mode may activate automatically,
depending on the outside temperature.
Activating/switching
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Dual-zone automatic climate control
tion lock (Y page 139).
Different temperatures can be set for the
X Set the desired temperature.
driver's and front-passenger sides.
X To activate: press the à button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
The indicator lamp in the à button lights tion lock (Y page 139).
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
X To increase/reduce: turn control : or B
are activated.
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 125).
130 Operating the climate control systems

Only change the temperature setting in S Directs air through the center, side and
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). footwell vents
i If you turn controls : and B counter- ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
clockwise to the lowest temperature set- b Directs the airflow through the
ting, air-recirculation mode may activate defroster, center and side air vents1
automatically, depending on the outside a Directs air through the defroster and
temperature. footwell vents
_ Directs the airflow through the
Setting the air distribution defroster, center, side and footwell air
vents2
Air-conditioning system
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- airflow is always directed through the side
tion lock (Y page 139). air vents. You can only close the side air
X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ vents, by fully closing the adjuster on the
Climate control

buttons. side air vents (Y page 135).

The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.
The following air distribution settings can be
Setting the airflow
selected: Air-conditioning system
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
O Directs air through the footwell air tion lock (Y page 139).
vents X To increase/reduce: turn control C
P Directs air through the center and side clockwise or counter-clockwise
air vents (Y page 123).
i You can also activate several air distribu-
tion settings simultaneously. To do this, Dual-zone automatic climate control
press multiple air distribution buttons. The X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
air is then directed through various vents.
tion lock (Y page 139).
X To increase/reduce: press the K or
2-zone automatic climate control
I button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the Switching the ZONE function on/off
desired symbol appears in the display.
This function is only available with 2-zone
The following air distribution settings can be automatic climate control on vehicles for
selected: Canada.
P Directs air through the center and side X To switch on: press the á button.
air vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights
O Directs air through the footwell air up. The temperature setting for the driver's
vents

1 Canada only.
2 Canada only.
 Operating the climate control systems 131

side is not adopted for the front-passenger MAX COOL maximum cooling
side.
The MAX COOL function is only available in
X To switch off: press button á.
vehicles for the USA.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out. The temperature setting for the driv- MAX COOL is only operational when the
er's side is adopted for the front-passenger engine is running.
side. X To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To activate: press off-road button Ù
Defrosting the windshield again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
General notes selected settings are restored.
You can use this function to defrost the wind- When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-
shield or to defrost the inside of the wind- trol switches to the following functions:
shield and the side windows.
Rmaximum cooling

Climate control
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-
Rmaximum airflow
tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Rair-recirculation mode on

Switching the "Windshield defrosting"

function on/off
Defrosting the windows
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 139). Windows fogged up on the inside
X To activate: press the ¬ button. X Activate the ¿/Á cooling with air
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights dehumidification function.
up. X 2-zone automatic air conditioning: activate
The climate control system switches to the the à mode button.
following functions: X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
Rhigh airflow the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
Rhigh temperature i You should only select this setting until
Rair distribution to the windshield and the windshield is clear again.
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
Windows fogged up on the outside

X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. X Activate the windshield wipers.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes X Air conditioning: press the P or O
out. The previously selected settings are button.
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains X 2-zone automatic air conditioning: press
deactivated. the _ button until the P or O
or symbol appears in the display.
X 2-zone automatic climate control: press i You should only select this setting until
the à button. the windshield is clear again.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
132 Operating the climate control systems

Rear window defroster

General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivating
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press the ¤ button.
Climate control

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights

up or goes out.
 Operating the climate control systems 133

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
the ¤ button sumers are switched on.
flashes. The rear win- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
dow defroster has lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
deactivated prema- When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
turely or cannot be acti- defroster can be activated again.
vated.
The roof is open.
X Close the roof.
When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be acti-
vated again.

Climate control
Activating/deactivating air-recircula- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
tion mode matically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at out-
General notes
side temperatures below approximately
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the 41 ‡ (5 †)
windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-
lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-
lation mode briefly to prevent the windows ted
from fogging up. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
side temperatures above approximately
Activating/deactivating 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- midification" function is activated
tion lock (Y page 139).
X To activate: press the g button.
Activating/deactivating the residual
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
heat function
up.
i Air-recirculation mode is automatically General notes
activated at high levels of pollution (dual-
The residual heat function is only available on
zone automatic climate control only) or at
vehicles for Canada.
high outside temperatures. When air-recir-
culation mode is activated automatically, It is possible to make use of the residual heat
the indicator lamp in the g button is not of the engine to continue heating the station-
lit. Outside air is added after about ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
30 minutes. engine has been switched off. The heating
time depends on the temperature that has
X To deactivate: press the g button. been set.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
Depending on the equipment level, the con-
out.
trol panel has either the Ì button or the
Á button.
134 Setting the air vents

Activating/deactivating In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
please observe the following notes:
tion lock or remove it (Y page 139).
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in
X To activate: press the Ì or Á but-
ton. the engine compartment on the front-
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á passenger side free of blockages, such as
ice, snow or leaves.
button lights up.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
in the vehicle interior.
less of the airflow setting.
i You can move the adjusters for the air
i If you activate the residual heat function
vents vertically or horizontally to set the
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
direction of the airflow.
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed. i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
X To deactivate: press the Ì or Á open the air vents completely and set the
Climate control

button. adjusters to the central position.

The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á
button goes out.
Setting the center air vents
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
X To open the center air vent: turn the
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
adjuster in one of center air vents : coun-
is a risk of injury.
ter-clockwise.
X To close the center air vent: turn the
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to wise until it engages.
another area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head restraints.
This could result in burns in the immediate
vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
 Setting the air vents 135

Setting the side air vents

You can adjust the blower output of AIR-

: Side window defroster vent SCARF vents : using the AIRSCARF button
(Y page 100).
; Side air vent
X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster

Climate control
in side air vent ; counter-clockwise.
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; clockwise until it
engages.

Setting the blower output of the AIR-

SCARF vents
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head restraints.
This could result in burns in the immediate
vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.

Z
136
 137

Useful information ............................ 138

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
............................................................. 138
Driving ............................................... 139

Driving and parking

Manual transmission ........................ 150
Automatic transmission ................... 151
Refueling ............................................ 158
Parking ............................................... 161
Driving tips ........................................ 164
Driving systems ................................ 169
138 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Useful information RChange gear in good time, before the tach-

ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
i This Operator's manual describes all area of the tachometer.
models and all standard and optional equip- RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
ment of your vehicle available at the time of brake the vehicle.
Driving and parking

publication of the Operator's manual. Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Country-specific differences are possible.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
Please note that your vehicle may not be
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
equipped with all features described. This
down).
also applies to safety-related systems and
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
functions.
drive in program C.
i Read the information on qualified special- After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can
ist workshops (Y page 26). increase the engine speed gradually and bring
the vehicle to full speed.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-
cles:
Important safety notes RDo not drive faster than 85 mph
The sensor system of some driving and driv- (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles
ing safety systems adjusts automatically (1,500 km).
while a certain distance is being driven after ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
the vehicle has been delivered or after engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not RChange gear in good time.
reached until the end of this teach-in proce-
dure. i You should also observe these notes on
breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- i Always observe the respective speed lim-
sate for this by applying greater force to the its.
brake pedal.

AMG vehicles with self-locking rear

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) axle differential
The more you look after the engine when it is Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
new, the more satisfied you will be with its differential on the rear axle. To protect the
performance in the future. differential on the rear axle, carry out an oil
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- change after a breaking-in phase of
cle and engine speeds for the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil change pro-
1,000 miles (1,500 km). longs the service life of the differential. Have
the oil change carried out at a qualified spe-
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-
cialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
tle, during this period.
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
 Driving 139

Driving ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use

the engine's full performance until it has
Important safety notes reached operating temperature.
G WARNING Only shift the automatic transmission to
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the the desired drive position when the vehicle

Driving and parking

pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. is stationary.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. wheels when pulling away on slippery
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are roads. You could otherwise damage the
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter drive train.
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-
securely and as specified in order to ensure atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use engine speed is restricted in order to pro-
loose floormats and do not place floormats on tect the engine. To protect the engine and
top of one another. maintain smooth engine operation, avoid
driving at full throttle when the engine is
G WARNING cold.
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles
SmartKey positions
Rshoes with high heels SmartKey
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.

G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
g To remove the SmartKey
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident. Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
shift the transmission to position P
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
G WARNING as the windshield wipers
If the parking brake has not been fully 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
released when driving, the parking brake can: and drive position
3 To start the engine
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function. i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-
the parking brake fully before driving off. Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Z
140 Driving

KEYLESS-GO the Start/Stop button for approximately

three seconds. This function operates inde-
General notes pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with engine switch-off function.
a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
Driving and parking

GO start function and a detachable Start/

Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into
the ignition lock, the system needs approx-
imately two seconds recognition time. You
can then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only : Start/Stop button
the case if you are not depressing the brake ; Ignition lock
pedal.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
ately.
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
A check which periodically establishes a radio see (Y page 245).
connection between the vehicle and the
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
being removed from the ignition.
when starting the engine.
X To switch on the power supply: press
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey: Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in now activate the windshield wipers, for
the ignition lock. example.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
i If you then open the driver's door when in
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the this position, the power supply is deactiva-
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73). ted.
Do not keep the SmartKey: X To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile Stop button : twice.
phone or another SmartKey The ignition is switched on.
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal i The ignition is switched off when:
foil Rthe driver's door is opened and
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once
This can impair the functionality of the KEY- when in this position
LESS-GO key.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
 Driving 141

Starting the engine

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,

Driving and parking

they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
= Start/Stop button USA
? Start/Stop button Canada Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Removing the Start/Stop button Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
position P or shift manual transmission into
neutral.
Rstart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- G WARNING
mal using the SmartKey. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
lock ;. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
button from the ignition lock when you out sufficient ventilation.
leave the vehicle. You should, however,
always take the SmartKey with you when G WARNING
leaving the vehicle. As long as the Smart- Flammable materials introduced through
Key is in the vehicle: environmental influence or by animals can
Rthe vehicle can be started using the ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
Start/Stop button parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
Relectrically powered equipment can be of fire.
operated. Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.

! Do not depress the accelerator when

starting the engine.
Z
142 Driving

i AMG vehicles: the exhaust flap of the X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
exhaust system will be checked after every depressed.
cold start. A resulting noise can be heard X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 140)
during this process. once.
i During a cold start, the engine runs at The engine starts.
Driving and parking

higher speeds to enable the catalytic con-

verter to reach its operating temperature.
The sound of the engine may change during Pulling away
this time. Manual transmission
Manual transmission ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
ning the wheels. You could otherwise dam-
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it age the vehicle.
depressed.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
i You can only start the engine when the X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
clutch pedal is fully depressed. X Release the electric parking brake
(Y page 162).
Automatic transmission X Release the brake pedal.
X Shift the transmission to position P. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
The transmission position display in the depress the accelerator pedal.
multifunction display shows P.
i Follow the shift recommendations in the
i You can also start the engine when the multifunction display for an economical
transmission is in position N. driving style (Y page 151).
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
Starting procedure with the SmartKey pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- drop down.
tion lock (Y page 139) and release it as You can open the doors from the inside at
soon as the engine is running. any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
i To start the engine using the SmartKey ing feature (Y page 207).
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
Stop button out of the ignition lock. Automatic transmission
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G WARNING
i The Start/Stop button can be used to If the engine speed is above the idling speed
start the vehicle manually without inserting and you engage transmission position D or R,
the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
Start/Stop button must be inserted in the a risk of an accident.
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in When engaging transmission position D or R,
the vehicle. This mode for starting the always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
engine operates independently of the ECO not simultaneously accelerate.
start/stop automatic engine start function.
 Driving 143

i It is only possible to shift the transmission X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
from position P to the desired position if The vehicle is then held for about a second.
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is X Pull away.
the shift lock released.
Hill start assist is not active if:
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a

Driving and parking

depressed.
downhill gradient.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
X Release the brake pedal. the transmission is in N.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
The electric parking brake (Y page 162) is RESP® is malfunctioning.
automatically released.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ECO start/stop function
ter goes out.
Introduction
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors The ECO start/stop function switches the
drop down. engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
You can open the doors from the inside at ped under certain conditions.
any time. The engine starts automatically when the
You can also deactivate the automatic lock- driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
ing feature (Y page 207). start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
i Upshifts take place at higher engine of your vehicle.
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating Important safety notes
temperature more quickly.
G WARNING
Hill start assist If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
There is a risk of accident and injury.
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
This gives you enough time to move your foot the ignition and secure the vehicle against
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal rolling away.
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.

Z
144 Driving

General notes SLK 55 AMG

SLK 250
Driving and parking

: ECO start/stop display

: ECO start/stop display

If the è ECO symbol is shown in green in
the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
If the è ECO symbol is shown in green in function switches the engine off automati-
the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop cally if the vehicle stops moving.
function switches the engine off automati- Every time you switch on the engine using the
cally if the vehicle stops moving. SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO
Every time you switch on the engine using the start/stop function is activated.
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO If the ECO start/stop function has been man-
start/stop function is activated. ually deactivated (Y page 147) or a malfunc-
If the ECO start/stop function has been man- tion has caused the system to be deactivated,
ually deactivated (Y page 147) or a malfunc- the è ECO symbol is not displayed.
tion has caused the system to be deactivated, The ECO start/stop function is only available
the è ECO symbol is not displayed. in drive program C.
SLK 350 i If automatic cylinder shut-off is active in
drive program C, then 4, the number of
active cylinders, is also shown in the è
ECO symbol. This means that the engine is
operating with four cylinders.
If cylinder shut-off is not active, the engine
will operate with all eight cylinders. In this
case, 8, the number of active cylinders, is
: ECO start/stop display shown in the è ECO symbol.
If the engine has been switched off automat-
ically by the ECO start/stop function, the Automatic engine switch-off
è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunc-
tion display. Operation (SLK 250)
Every time you switch on the engine using the The ECO start/stop function is operational
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO and the è ECO symbol is displayed in
start/stop function is activated. green in the multifunction display, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
ature.
 Driving 145

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior The ECO start/stop function switches off the
has been reached. engine automatically at low speeds.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. X Brake the vehicle.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is X Engage neutral N (follow gearshift instruc-
not fogged up when the air-conditioning tion : to engage neutral N, if necessary).

Driving and parking

system is switched on. X Release the clutch pedal.
Rthe hood is closed.
The engine is switched off automatically.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened. Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the conditions for automatic engine switch- (SLK 250)
off are not all fulfilled, the è symbol is lit If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
yellow. the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically. SLK 350
i The engine can be switched off automat- If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
ically a maximum of four times (first stop the ECO start/stop function switches off the
and three subsequent stops) in succession. engine automatically.
The è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in The ECO start/stop function is operational
the multifunction display after the engine when:
has been started automatically for the Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
fourth time. When the è ECO symbol is green.
shown in green in the multifunction display,
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
automatic engine switch-off is again possi-
that is suitable for the system.
ble.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
i The HOLD function can be activated if the ature.
engine has been switched off automati- Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
cally. It is then not necessary to continue has been reached.
applying the brakes during the automatic
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
stop phase. When you depress the accel-
erator pedal, the engine starts automati- Rthe system detects that the windshield is

cally and the braking effect of the HOLD not fogged up when the air-conditioning
function is deactivated. system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Vehicles with manual transmission (SLK
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
250)
seat belt is fastened.
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically.
i The engine can be switched off automat-
ically a maximum of four times (first stop
and three subsequent stops) in succession.
i The HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off automati-
cally. It is then not necessary to continue
applying the brakes during the automatic
Z
146 Driving

stop phase. When you depress the accel- Automatic engine start
erator pedal, the engine starts automati-
cally and the braking effect of the HOLD Operation (SLK 250)
function is deactivated. The engine starts automatically if:
SLK 55 AMG Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
Driving and parking

by pressing the ECO button.

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically. Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the

The ECO start/stop function is operational driver's door.

and the è ECO symbol is displayed in Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe brake system requires this.

Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
green. ates from the set range.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
that is suitable for the system. shield when the air-conditioning system is
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- switched on.
ature. Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

Vehicles with manual transmission (SLK
has been reached. 250)
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is
Rthe system detects that the windshield is depressed.
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
The engine is started automatically if you:
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed. Rfully depress the clutch pedal.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
seat belt is fastened. Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the conditions for automatic engine switch- (SLK 250)
off are not all fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is The engine is started automatically if you:
lit yellow.
Rrelease the brake pedal in transmission
i All of the vehicle's systems remain active position D or N when the HOLD function is
when the engine is stopped automatically. not active.
i The engine can be automatically switched Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
off an unlimited number of times. Rmove the transmission out of position P.

i The HOLD function can be activated if the i Shifting the transmission to position P
engine has been switched off automati- does not start the engine.
cally. It is then not necessary to continue
applying the brakes during the automatic i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
stop phase. When you depress the accel- the ECO start/stop function is available
erator pedal, the engine starts automati- again once the è ECO symbol reap-
cally and the braking effect of the HOLD pears in green in the multifunction display.
function is deactivated.
 Driving 147

SLK 350 Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-

The engine starts automatically if: shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.
by pressing the ECO button.
Rin transmission position D or N the brake i Shifting the transmission to position P

Driving and parking

pedal is released and the HOLD function is does not start the engine.
not active.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
the ECO start/stop function is available
Ryou engage reverse gear R. again once the è ECO symbol reap-
Ryou move the transmission out of position pears in green in the multifunction display.
P.
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
driver's door. stop function
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
SLK 250
Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range.
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position P

does not start the engine.
SLK 55 AMG
The engine starts automatically if: X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; and the è ECO sym-
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bol in the multifunction display go out.
by pressing the ECO button.
Rin transmission position D or N the brake
X To activate: press ECO button :.
pedal is released and the HOLD function is Indicator lamp ; lights up.
not active. If all conditions for automatic engine
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the
è ECO symbol is shown in green in the
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
multifunction display.
Ryou move the transmission out of position
If not all conditions for automatic engine
P. switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the
Ryou switch to drive program S or M. è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the multifunction display.
driver's door. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func-
Rthe vehicle starts to roll. tion is not available.
Rthe brake system requires this. Conditions for the automatic engine
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- switch-off (Y page 144).
ates from the set range.

Z
148 Driving

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ X To switch off: in drive program C, press
stop function has been deactivated man- ECO button :.
ually or as the result of a malfunction. The or
engine will then not be switched off auto- X Switch to drive program S or M
matically when the vehicle stops. (Y page 153).
Driving and parking

i The ECO start/stop function is activated Indicator lamp ; and the è ECO sym-
each time the engine is switched on. bol in the multifunction display go out.
SLK 350 X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive pro-
gram S or M is active, the automatic trans-
mission switches to drive program C.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the
è ECO symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the
è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the
multifunction display.
X To deactivate: press ECO button :. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func-
Indicator lamp ; goes out. tion is not available.
X To activate: press ECO button :. Conditions for the automatic engine
Indicator lamp ; lights up. switch-off (Y page 144).

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated man- stop function has been deactivated man-
ually or as the result of a malfunction. The ually or as the result of a malfunction. The
engine will then not be switched off auto- engine will then not be switched off auto-
matically when the vehicle stops. matically when the vehicle stops.

i The ECO start/stop function is activated i Each time the engine is started, the ECO
each time the engine is switched on. start/stop function switches to the status
(on or off) that was selected before switch-
SLK 55 AMG ing off the engine.
 Driving 149

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 181) or DISTRONIC

Driving and parking

PLUS (Y page 171).
X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
ning smoothly and is component of the engine management system.
misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Z
150 Manual transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
value above 248 ‡ X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
Driving and parking

(120 †). The coolant cool down.

warning lamp may also X
Check the coolant level (Y page 281). Observe the warning
be on and a warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
tone may sound.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and start/stop traffic.

Manual transmission
Gear lever
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is
depressed.
! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,
you should always push the gear lever all
the way to the right. You could otherwise
shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear
and damage the transmission.
If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- Gear lever
mission braking), this can cause the engine k Reverse gear
to overrev, leading to engine damage. 1 - 6 Forward gears
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by
using the clutch pedal. There is otherwise a
risk of damaging the clutch. Engaging reverse gear
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could
damage the transmission.
X Stop the vehicle.
X Depress the clutch pedal fully.
X Shift to neutral N.
X Move the gear lever firmly to the left
beyond the point of resistance and then
forwards.
 Automatic transmission 151

i The ECO start/stop function is not avail- Selector lever

able when reverse gear is engaged.
Further information on the ECO start/stop
Overview of transmission positions
function (Y page 144).

Driving and parking

Shift recommendation

Selector lever
X Shift gear according to gearshift recom- j Park position with selector lever lock
mendation : when shown in the multi-
k Reverse gear
function display of the instrument cluster.
i Neutral
The gearshift recommendations assist you in h Drive
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
Transmission position and drive pro-
display.
gram display

Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
: Transmission position display
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
; Drive program display
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, The current position of the selector lever is
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do shown by the indicators next to the selector
not simultaneously accelerate. lever.
The indicators light up when the SmartKey is
G WARNING inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators
The automatic transmission switches to neu- go out when the SmartKey is removed from
tral position N when you switch off the engine. the ignition lock.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.

Z
152 Automatic transmission

Transmission positions A Neutral

Park position Do not shift the transmission to N
B
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
Do not shift the transmission into matic transmission could be dam-
position P (Y page 151) unless the aged.
Driving and parking

vehicle is stationary. The parking

No power is transmitted from the
lock should not be used as a brake
engine to the drive wheels.
when parking. Always apply the
electronic parking brake in addi- Releasing the brake pedal will allow
tion to the parking lock in order to you to move the vehicle freely, e.g.
secure the vehicle. to push it or tow it.
The SmartKey can only be removed If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
if the transmission is in position P. only shift the transmission to posi-
If the SmartKey is removed from tion N if the vehicle is in danger of
the ignition lock, the selector lever skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
is locked. ! Rolling in neutral N can damage
If the vehicle electronics are mal- the drive train.
functioning, the selector lever may
be locked in position P. To release 7 Drive
a locked selector lever, see "Man- The automatic transmission
ual override of parking lock" changes gear automatically. All
(Y page 158). forward gears are available.
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R Driving tips
when the vehicle is stationary.
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gear shift-
ing behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 153)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
(Y page 152)
Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
 Automatic transmission 153

Double-clutch function As well as this permanent drive program M,

you can also activate temporary drive pro-
When shifting down, the double-clutch func-
gram M (Y page 154).
tion is active regardless of the currently selec-
ted drive program. The double-clutch function In AMG vehicles, drive program E is called
reduces load change reactions and is condu- drive program C.

Driving and parking

cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-
erated by the double-clutch function depends E Economy Comfortable, economical
on the drive program selected. C Controlled driving
Efficiency
Kickdown S Sport Sporty driving style
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
M Manual Manual gear shifting
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
Only change from automatic drive program E
The automatic transmission shifts to a
or S to manual drive program M when the
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
vehicle is stationary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached. i When the engine is started, the automatic
The automatic transmission shifts back up. transmission always switches to automatic
drive program E (drive program C in AMG
vehicles).
Program selector button i AMG vehicles: when in drive program C
General notes and with a small load demand, the engine
will automatically only operate with four
cylinders. This is the case in city traffic or
on a country road, for example. This
reduces fuel consumption. Cylinder shut-
off is inactive in drive programs S and M, so
that the engine will operate with all eight
cylinders.
i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 154).

Example: program selector button

X Press program selector button : repeat-
edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
program appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving character-
istics.
i Further information about permanent
drive program M (Y page 155).

Z
154 Automatic transmission

Steering wheel paddle shifters Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
Driving and parking

driven at lower engine speeds and the

wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
Rsporty engine and transmission settings
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter later

Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
In the manual drive program, you can change as a result of the later automatic transmis-
gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters sion shift points
or the selector lever (Y page 154).
Further information about permanent drive Manual drive program M
program M (Y page 155).
Further information about temporary drive General notes
program M (Y page 154). In this drive program, you can briefly change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-
i The full range of functions for the steering
dle shifters. The transmission must be in posi-
wheel paddle shifters is available only once
tion D.
operating temperature has been reached.
You can activate manual drive program M in
i You can only change gear with the steer- the E and S automatic drive programs.
ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-
mission is in position D. i As well as temporary drive program M,
you can also activate permanent drive pro-
gram M (Y page 153).
Automatic drive program Further information about permanent drive
program M (Y page 155).
Automatic drive programs E and S
Activating
Drive program E (drive program C on MAG
vehicles) is characterized by the following: X Shift the transmission to position D.
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission
settings shifter (Y page 154).
Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
vated. The selected gear and M appear in
the automatic transmission shifting up
the multifunction display.
sooner
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
 Automatic transmission 155

Upshifting the transmission shifts to the optimal gear

X Briefly press the selector lever to the right for the current speed.
towards D+. i If the engine exceeds the maximum
or engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle matic transmission protects against engine

Driving and parking

shifter (Y page 154). damage by not shifting down.
In cases where it is permissible, the auto- i Automatic down shifting occurs when
matic transmission shifts up to the next coasting.
gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the cur- Deactivating
rently engaged gear is reached and you If you have activated manual drive program
continue to accelerate, the automatic M, it will remain active for a certain amount of
transmission automatically shifts up in time. Under certain conditions the minimum
order to prevent engine damage. amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of
lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase
Shift recommendation
or when driving on steep terrain.
If manual drive program M has been deacti-
vated, the automatic transmission shifts into
the automatic drive program that was last
selected, i.e. E or S.
You can also deactivate manual drive pro-
gram M yourself:
The gearshift recommendations assist you in X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 154).
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction or
display. X Use the lever to switch the transmission
X Shift to recommended gear ; according position.
to gearshift recommendation : when or
shown in the multifunction display of the X Use the program selector button to change
instrument cluster. the drive program (Y page 153).
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
Downshifting
The automatic transmission switches into
X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
the automatic drive program that was last
towards D–. selected, i.e. E or S.
or
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 154). Manual drive program
In cases where it is permissible, the auto-
matic transmission shifts down to the next General information
gear. In this drive program, you can permanently
i For maximum acceleration, push the change gear yourself by using the steering
selector lever to the left or pull and hold the wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until be in position D.

Z
156 Automatic transmission

i As well as this permanent drive program shown in the multifunction display of the
M, you can also activate temporary drive instrument cluster.
program M (Y page 154).
AMG vehicles
Switching on the manual drive program
! In manual drive program M, the automatic
Driving and parking

Manual drive program M is different from transmission does not shift up automati-
drive program S with regard to spontaneity, cally even when the engine limiting speed
responsiveness and smoothness of gear for the current gear is reached. When the
changes. engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel
Manual drive program M can be selected supply is cut to prevent the engine from
using the program selector button. You can overrevving. Always make sure that the
change gear using the steering wheel paddle engine speed does not reach the red area of
shifters or the selector lever in manual drive the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of
program M if the transmission is in position D. engine damage.
The selected gear appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
X Press the program selector button
(Y page 153) repeatedly until M appears in
the multifunction display.

Upshifting : Gear indicator

X Briefly press the selector lever to the right ; Upshift indicator
towards D+. Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
or an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle tifunction display.
shifter (Y page 154). X If the color in the speedometer multifunc-
The automatic transmission shifts up to the tion display changes to red and the UP dis-
next gear. play message is shown, shift up a gear.

Shift recommendation Downshifting

X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
towards D–.
or
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 154).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
The gearshift recommendations assist you in the next gear.
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction shifting down, the automatic transmission
display. will shift down to a gear that will allow the
X Shift to recommended gear ; according vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
to gearshift recommendation : when
 Automatic transmission 157

i For maximum acceleration, push the

selector lever to the left or pull and hold the
left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until
the transmission shifts to the optimal gear
for the current speed.

Driving and parking

Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use
kickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off the manual drive program

X Press the program selector button
(Y page 153) repeatedly until E (C in AMG
vehicles) or S appears in the multifunction
display.

Z
158 Refueling

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking

shop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manually at rear edge =, pulling it up and out at the
same time.
! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to X Press release button ? down and simul-
remove the selector lever gaiter from the
taneously move the selector lever out of
center console. This could damage the
position P.
selector lever gaiter.
The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is
possible to release the selector lever lock
manually to move it out of position P. This is
the case, for example, if you wish to tow the
vehicle away.

Refueling
Important safety notes
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Press the frame of selector level gaiter : G WARNING
together somewhat on the side edge at the Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
back and hold with one hand ;. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
X With the other hand, pry off the frame of sion.
selector level gaiter : with a flat, blunt You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in cloth) sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
 Refueling 159

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
refueling. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
G WARNING ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection

Driving and parking

There is a risk of injury. system could be blocked by particles from
You must make sure that fuel does not come the fuel can.
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing Do not get into the vehicle again during the
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. charge could build up again.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
observe the following: out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately For further information on fuel and fuel quality
using soap and water. (Y page 348).
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Refueling
out delay.
General information
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
ing. matically when you open or close the vehicle
RImmediately change out of clothing which with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
has come into contact with fuel. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
G WARNING next to the filling pump indicates the side of
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and the vehicle.
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion. Opening the fuel filler flap
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- : Fuel filler flap
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel ; To insert the fuel filler cap
tank and fuel lines drained completely. = Tire pressure table
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the ? Fuel type to be used
fuel system.

Z
160 Refueling

X Switch the engine off.

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
Driving and parking

The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flap

X Place fuel filler cap on the fuel filler neck
and turn clockwise until it engages.
X Close fuel filler flap :.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. The ; Check Engine warning
lamp may also light up. A message appears
in the multifunction display (Y page 231).
For further information on warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 251).
 Parking 161

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.

Driving and parking

G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 139).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 74).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk

of an accident.
Important safety notes
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or G WARNING
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Rrelease the parking brake.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- position P or shift manual transmission into
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to neutral.
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
Rstart the engine.
fields.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
G WARNING ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available When leaving the vehicle, always take the
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
for example, the power steering and the brake leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
boosting effect. You will require considerably

Z
162 Parking

! Always secure the vehicle correctly Using the SmartKey

against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
or its drivetrain could be damaged. tion lock and remove it.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against The immobilizer is activated.
rolling away unintentionally: i The SmartKey can only be removed if the
Driving and parking

Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. transmission is in position P.

Ron vehicles with manual transmission, Using KEYLESS-GO
engage first gear or reverse gear. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 140).
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, The engine stops and all the indicator
the transmission must be in park position P lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
and the transmission position display in the i When the driver's door is closed, this cor-
multifunction display must show P. responds to key position 1. When the driv-
Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the er's door is open, this corresponds to key
ignition lock. position 0: "Key removed".
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards If you try to switch off the engine when the
the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- transmission is not in position P, a message
ents. appears in the multifunction display. A signal
sounds.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes Electric parking brake
General notes
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu- G WARNING
tral position N when you switch off the engine. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
accident.
Rrelease the parking brake.
After switching off the engine, always switch
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
position P or shift manual transmission into
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake. neutral.
Rstart the engine.

Vehicles with manual transmission In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. an accident and injury.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- When leaving the vehicle, always take the
tion lock and remove it. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
The immobilizer is activated. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
X Apply the electric parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
 Parking 163

The function of the electric parking brake is X To release: switch on the ignition.
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- X Pull handle :.
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
in the system, it may not be possible to apply only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
the released parking brake. ter goes out.

Driving and parking

X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on i The electric parking brake can only be
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- released:
ing away. Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: ignition lock (Y page 139) or
shift the automatic transmission to posi- Rif the ignition was switched on using the
tion P. Start/Stop button.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
engage first gear. Applying automatically
It may not be possible to release an applied The electric parking brake is applied auto-
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or matically:
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
a qualified specialist workshop.
standstill or
i The electric parking brake performs a Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
function test at regular intervals while the stationary
engine is switched off. The sounds that can
be heard while this is occurring are normal. In addition, at least one of the following con-
ditions must be fulfilled:
Applying/releasing manually Rthe engine is switched off.
Rthe driver's seat belt is not inserted in the
belt buckle and the driver's door is open.
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.

Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake is released auto-
XTo engage: push handle :. matically when all of the following conditions
When the electric parking brake is are fulfilled:
engaged, the F (USA only) or ! Rthe engine is running.
(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up Rthe transmission is in position D or R.
in the instrument cluster. Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened.
i The electric parking brake can also be Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
applied when the SmartKey is removed.
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk
lid must be closed.

Z
164 Driving tips

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following X Connecting a trickle charger.
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically i You can obtain information about trickle
release the electric parking brake: chargers from a qualified specialist work-
Rthe driver's door is closed. shop.
Ryou have shifted out of P or you have pre- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
Driving and parking

viously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
i The electric parking brake can only be
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
released automatically on vehicles with
automatic transmission. seek advice.

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-

ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the Driving tips
parking brake will be released and the vehicle
will start to move. General notes

Emergency braking Important safety notes

The vehicle can also be braked during an G WARNING

emergency by using the electric parking If you switch off the ignition while driving,
brake. safety-relevant functions are only available
X While driving, push handle : of the electric with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
parking brake. for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
i The vehicle is braked for as long as the more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
handle of the electric parking brake is
of an accident.
pressed. The longer the electric parking
brake handle is depressed, the greater the Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
braking force.
G WARNING
During braking:
If you operate mobile communication equip-
Ra warning tone sounds ment while driving, you will be distracted from
Rthe Please Release Parking Brake traffic conditions. You could also lose control
message appears of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- is stationary.
ter flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- Observe the legal requirements for the coun-
still, the electric parking brake is engaged. try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
phone while driving a vehicle.
Parking the vehicle for a long period If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
exhaustive discharging.
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
 Driving tips 165

a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per Certain engine systems are designed to keep

second. the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
Drive sensibly – save fuel These systems only work at peak efficiency if
Observe the following tips to save fuel: they are serviced exactly in accordance with

Driving and parking

the manufacturer's specifications. All work
RThe tires should always be inflated to the on the engine must be carried out only by
recommended tire pressure. qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz
RRemove unnecessary loads. technicians.
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. The engine settings must not be changed
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
RObserve the service intervals in the Main- specific service work must be carried out at
tenance Booklet or in the service interval regular intervals and in accordance with the
display. Have all the maintenance work car- Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
ried in accordance with Daimler AG regu- can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
lations.
Fuel consumption also increases when driv- ECO display
ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can Example: ECO display
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- The ECO display provides feedback on how
ment. economical your driving characteristics are.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- The ECO display assists you in achieving the
dent is greatly increased when you drink or most economical driving style for the selec-
take drugs and drive. ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow driving style can significantly influence the
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- vehicle's consumption.
ing drugs. The ECO display consists of three bars:
RAcceleration
Emission control RConstant

G WARNING RCoasting

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust The percent value is the average value of the
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling three bars. The three bars and the mean value
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There begin at the value of 50 %. A higher percent-
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave age indicates a more economical driving
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- style.
out sufficient ventilation. The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count

Z
166 Driving tips

in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed i The ECO display summarizes the driving
consumption. characteristics from the start of the journey
Apart from driving style, consumption is to its completion. For this reason, the bars
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are
Rload
Driving and parking

fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,

Rtire pressure carry out a manual reset.
Rcold start
For further information on the ECO display,
Rchoice of route
see (Y page 198).
Relectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play. Brakes
The evaluation of your driving style is carried Important safety notes
out using the following three categories:
RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera- G WARNING
tion processes): If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, an attempt to increase the engine's braking
especially at higher speeds effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration There is an increased danger of skidding and
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
accidents.
at all times): Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
- The bar fills up: constant speed and
ing on a slippery road surface.
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration Downhill gradients
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed ! On long, steep gradients, you must
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration reduce the load on the brakes. To use
processes): engine braking, shift to a lower gear in good
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, time. This helps you to avoid overheating
keeping your distance and early release the brakes and wearing them out exces-
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast sively.
without use of the brakes. When making use of the engine braking
- The bar empties: frequent braking effect, it is possible that a drive wheel may
not turn for some time, e.g. in the case of
i An economical driving style specially suddenly changing or slippery road surface
requires driving at moderate engine conditions. This could cause damage to the
speeds. drive train. This type of damage is not cov-
To achieve a higher value in the categories ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Acceleration and Constant
Constant:
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
and steep downhill gradients. This is espe-
Rdrive in drive program E (vehicles with an cially important if the vehicle is laden.
automatic transmission).
i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will change.
 Driving tips 167

Heavy and light loads RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do not
G WARNING endanger other road users when doing so.
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
driving, the braking system can overheat. This beginning and end of a journey.
increases the stopping distance and can even

Driving and parking

RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
ahead.
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Servicing the brakes
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time. ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a warn-
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly ing tone while the engine is running, the
results in excessive and premature wear to brake fluid level may be too low. Observe
the brake pads. additional warning messages in the multi-
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy function display.
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but The brake fluid level may be too low due to
drive on for a short while. This allows the air- brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
flow to cool the brakes more quickly. Have the brake system checked immedi-
ately. This work should be carried out at a
Wet roads qualified specialist workshop.
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain ! As the ESP® system operates automati-
without braking, there may be a delayed reac- cally, the engine and the ignition must be
tion from the brakes when braking for the first switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has the ignition lock) if the electric parking
been washed or driven through deep water. brake is being tested on a brake dynamom-
You then have to depress the brake pedal eter (maximum 10 seconds).
more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from Braking triggered automatically by ESP®
the vehicle in front. may seriously damage the brake system.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- All checks and maintenance work on the
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- brake system must be carried out at a quali-
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up fied specialist workshop. Have this work car-
the brake discs, thereby drying them more ried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
quickly and protecting them against corro- ter.
sion.
Have the brake pads replaced and the brake
fluid renewed at a qualified specialist work-
Limited braking performance on salt-
shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
treated roads
ter.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt If the brake system has only been subject to
residue may form on the brake discs and moderate loads, you should test the function-
brake pads. This can result in a significantly ality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do
longer braking distance. so, depress the brake pedal firmly when driv-
ing at a high speed. This improves the grip of
the brake pads.
A description of Brake Assist (BAS):
(Y page 62)
Z
168 Driving tips

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only your driving and braking accordingly during
have brake pads/linings installed on your this break-in period.
vehicle which have been approved for Excessive heavy braking results in corre-
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond spondingly high brake wear. Observe the
to an equivalent quality standard. Brake brake system warning lamp in the instrument
Driving and parking

pads/linings which have not been approved cluster and note any brake status messages
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not in the multifunction display. Especially for
of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi- high performance driving, it is important to
cle's operating safety. maintain and have the brake system checked
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only regularly.
use brake fluid that has been specially
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
or which corresponds to an equivalent quality Driving on wet roads
standard. Brake fluid which has not been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or Hydroplaning
which is not of an equivalent quality could If water has accumulated to a certain depth
affect your vehicle's operating safety. on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
High performance and ceramic brake Ryou drive at low speeds.
system for AMG vehicles
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
The high-performance brake system is only For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
available on AMG vehicles. conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
The AMG brake systems are designed for you must drive in the following manner:
heavy loads. This may lead to noise when Rlower your speed.
braking. This will depend on:
Ravoid ruts.
Rspeed
Ravoid sudden steering movements.
Rbraking force Rbrake carefully.
Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
humidity Driving on flooded roads
The wear of individual components of the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings ! Do not drive through flooded areas.
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- Check the depth of any water before driving
ing style and operating conditions. through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
For this reason, it is impossible to state a
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
mileage that will be valid under all circum-
This can damage the electronic compo-
stances. An aggressive driving style will lead
nents in the engine or the automatic trans-
to high wear. You can obtain more informa-
mission. Water can also be drawn in by the
tion on this from a qualified specialist work-
engine's air suction nozzles and this can
shop.
cause engine damage.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt
 Driving systems 169

Winter driving especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The

vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
G WARNING driving style. Always adapt your driving style
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
an attempt to increase the engine's braking weather conditions.

Driving and parking

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. You should pay special attention to road con-
There is an increased danger of skidding and ditions when temperatures are around freez-
accidents. ing point.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- For more information on driving with snow
ing on a slippery road surface. chains, see (Y page 313).
For more information on driving with summer
G DANGER tires, see (Y page 312).
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases section (Y page 312).
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of Driving systems
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating Cruise control
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
General notes
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a Cruise control maintains a constant road
window on the side of the vehicle that is not speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
facing into the wind. to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear
fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- in good time. By doing so, you will make use of
ter. the braking effect of the engine. This relieves
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road the load on the brake system and prevents
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering the brakes from overheating and wearing too
and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise quickly.
control. Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
stopped when moving at low speed: steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
(30 km/h).
shift to neutral.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Important safety notes
shift the transmission to position N.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
The outside temperature indicator is not
control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
control cannot take into account the road,
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
played after a short delay.
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
Z
170 Driving systems

for braking in good time and for staying in Storing, maintaining and calling up a
lane. speed
Do not use cruise control:
Storing and maintaining a speed
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
Driving and parking

speed.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
or down ?.
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
traction and the vehicle could then skid
pedal.
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
heavy rain or snow automatically maintains the stored speed.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored. You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Cruise control lever i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
RAlways drive at adequate, but not exces-
sive, engine speeds.
RChange gear in good time.
RIf possible, do not shift down several
Cruise control lever gears at a time.
: To store the current speed or a higher
Storing or calling up a speed
speed
; To store the current speed or call up the G WARNING
last stored speed If you call up the stored speed and it differs
= To store the current speed or a lower from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
speed ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
? To deactivate cruise control stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
When you activate cruise control, the stored dent.
speed is shown in the status indicator of the
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
multifunction display:
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 Miles do not know the stored speed, store the
RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h desired speed again.
 Driving systems 171

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever toward Deactivating cruise control
you =.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it

Driving and parking

stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.

Setting a speed
G WARNING
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment Cruise control lever
until the vehicle has made the necessary There are several ways to deactivate cruise
adjustments. control:
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
wards : .
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration or
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or X Brake.
serious injury to you and others. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- Ryou engage the electric parking brake
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
press the cruise control lever up : to the (30 km/h)
pressure point for a higher speed or RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
down ? for a lower speed. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you
Every time the cruise control lever is shift to a gear that is too high, and as a
pressed up or down, the last speed stored result the engine speed is too low
is increased or reduced. Ryou shift the transmission to position N
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
while driving
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
press the cruise control lever up : past
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
the pressure point for a higher speed or
trol Off message in the multifunction dis-
down ? for a lower speed.
play for approximately five seconds.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored i When you switch off the engine, the last
is increased or reduced. speed stored is cleared.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- DISTRONIC PLUS
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed General notes
to the last speed stored after you have fin-
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
ished overtaking.
automatically helps you maintain the dis-
tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS-

Z
172 Driving systems

TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
the set speed is not exceeded. any non-approved way.
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe- Any unauthorized modification to this
cially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a device could void the user's authority to
lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will operate the equipment.
Driving and parking

make use of the braking effect of the engine.

i Canada only: This device complies with
This relieves the load on the brake system and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
prevents the brakes from overheating and
subject to the following two conditions:
wearing too quickly.
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,
ference, and
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. It
maintains the preset distance to the vehicle in 2. this device must accept any interference
front. received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and Removal, tampering, or altering of the
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- device will void any warranties, and is not
vent a collision without your intervention. An permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
intermittent warning tone will then sound and in any non-approved way.
the distance warning lamp will light up in the Any unauthorized modification to this
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in device could void the user's authority to
order to increase the distance to the vehicle operate the equipment.
in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so. Important safety notes
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar
G WARNING
sensor system must be operational.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise Rpeople or animals
control in the speed range between 20 mph Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: ped or parked vehicles
200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of Roncoming and crossing traffic
you, it operates in the speed range between As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: warnings nor intervene in such situations.
200 km/h). There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
roads with steep gradients. uation and be ready to brake.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
can resemble the radar detectors of the G WARNING
responsible authorities. You can refer to the DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
questions are asked about this. uations.
i USA only: This device has been approved In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
The radar sensor is intended for use in an brake the vehicle
automotive radar system only. Removal,
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the Raccelerate unexpectedly
 Driving systems 173

There is a risk of an accident. In particular, the detection of obstacles can

Continue to drive carefully and be ready to be impaired if:
brake, in particular when warned to do so by Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
DISTRONIC PLUS. covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain

Driving and parking

G WARNING Rinterference by other radar sources
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this parking garages
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-
of an accident.
edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and speed.
try to take evasive action.
This speed may:
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- or an exit lane
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- hand lane
ing or other similar situations: Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
Rwhen towing the vehicle that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
Rin the car wash lane
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS- If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of driver of the speed stored.
accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account Cruise control lever
the road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS-
TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are respon-
sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,
for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and
for staying in lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose Cruise control lever
traction and the vehicle could then skid : To store the current speed or a higher
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, speed
heavy rain or snow ; To set the specified minimum distance
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow = To store the current speed or call up the
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or last stored speed
vehicles driving on a different line.

Z
174 Driving systems

? To store the current speed or a lower pressure point for a higher speed or
speed down ? for a lower speed.
A To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing, is increased or reduced.
Driving and parking

maintaining and calling up a speed or

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
Important safety notes ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function press the cruise control lever up : past
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- the pressure point for a higher speed or
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- down ? for a lower speed.
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC Every time the cruise control lever is
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- pressed up or down, the last speed stored
ing or other similar situations: is increased or reduced.
Rwhen towing the vehicle X Remove your foot from the accelerator

Rin the car wash pedal.

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol- vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: stored speed.
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up When driving at speeds below 20 mph
to two minutes after pulling away before (30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
Ryour vehicle must not be secured by the and is shown in the multifunction display. If
electric parking brake. the vehicle in front is no longer detected and
RESP® must be activated. displayed, for example because it has
Rthe transmission must be in position D. changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactiva-
ted. You will hear a warning tone if this is the
Rthe hood must be closed.
case.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be i If you do not fully release the accelerator
fastened. pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Inactive
Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play. The set distance to a slower-moving
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
Activating You will be driving at the speed you deter-
mine by the position of the accelerator
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
pedal.
you =, or press it up : or down ?.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Pulling away and driving
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
press the cruise control lever up : to the
 Driving systems 175

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
your foot from the brake pedal. tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards front becomes too small.
you =. Stopping
or

Driving and parking

G WARNING
X Accelerate briefly.
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
the voltage supply.
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.
It maintains the preset distance to the vehicle Rthe electrical system in the engine com-

in front. partment, the battery or the fuses have

been tampered with.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and Rthe battery is disconnected.

acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
vent a collision without your intervention. An e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
intermittent warning tone will then sound and There is a risk of an accident.
the distance warning lamp will light up in the If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
order to increase the distance from the vehi- against rolling away.
cle in front, or take evasive action, provided it
is safe to do so. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 178).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to is stationary.
the speed you have stored. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
Changing lanes stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake. After a time, the electric parking brake
If you wish to change to the passing lane (in
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
countries where traffic drives on the right, the
brake.
passing lane is the left-hand lane), DIS-
TRONIC PLUS supports you if: Depending on the specified minimum dis-
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
(60 km/h) front. The specified minimum distance is set
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- using the control on the cruise control lever.
tance to a vehicle in front
Ryou have switched on the corresponding
turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted

Z
176 Driving systems

The electric parking brake automatically Storing the current speed or calling up the
secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is last stored speed
activated and: G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's If you call up the stored speed and it differs
seat belt is unfastened. from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
matically switched off by the ECO start/ stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
stop function. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
Rthe hood is opened. dent.
Ra system malfunction occurs. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
Rthe power supply is not sufficient. tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec-
desired speed again.
tronics, a warning message may also appear
in the multifunction display. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
Brake Immediately you =.
X Immediately depress the brake firmly until X Remove your foot from the accelerator
the warning message in the multifunction pedal.
display goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is deac- DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
tivated. time it is activated, the current speed is
Shift to 'P' stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling away.
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn-
Setting a speed
ing message in the multifunction display Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
disappears. until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
The horn will also sound at regular intervals if the speed set.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-

Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
door and remove your seat belt. press the cruise control lever up : to the
Ropen the hood.
pressure point for a higher speed or
down ? for a lower speed.
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact Every time the cruise control lever is
that the vehicle has been parked while DIS- pressed up or down, the last speed stored
TRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound is increased or reduced.
becomes louder if you attempt to lock the
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DIS-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
TRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
press the cruise control lever up : past
i If the engine has been switched off, it the pressure point for a higher speed or
cannot be started again until DISTRONIC down ? for a lower speed.
PLUS has been deactivated. Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored
is increased or reduced.
 Driving systems 177

Setting the specified minimum distance DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-
ment cluster
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span Displays in the speedometer
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that

Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 177).
Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently
safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust
the distance to the vehicle in front if neces-
sary.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or

two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Cruise control lever
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
X To increase: turn control = toward ;. vated
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control = toward :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.

: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle

Z
178 Driving systems

X Select the Assistance Graphic function

using the on-board computer
(Y page 203).
In the Assistance menu of the on-board com-
puter, you can also activate or deactivate
Driving and parking

PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 203).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-
ted

Cruise control lever

There are several ways to deactivate DIS-
TRONIC PLUS:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
: Vehicle in front, if detected will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in
; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- the multifunction display for approximately
cle in front; adjustable five seconds.
= Own vehicle i The last speed stored remains stored until
? DISTRONIC PLUS activated you switch off the engine.
X Select the Assistance Graphic function i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
using the on-board computer depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
(Y page 203). erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
You will initially see the stored speed for adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
about five seconds when you activate DIS- speed stored after you have finished over-
TRONIC PLUS. taking.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS ted if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if
G WARNING
the vehicle is automatically secured with
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releases
the electric parking brake
the brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to a
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
speed below 20 mph (30km/h) by the system,
provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does not (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,
detect a vehicle directly in front. At this point, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detec-
the driver must apply the brakes in order to ted
slow down further and bring the vehicle to a RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
standstill. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
 Driving systems 179

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
you in order to pull away and the front- traveling on a different line. The distance to
passenger door is open the vehicle in front will be too short.
Rthe vehicle has skidded
Other vehicles changing lanes
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

Driving and parking

hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐
TRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunc-
tion display for approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-
deactivated.
cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
Cornering, going into and coming out of a will be too short.
bend
Narrow vehicles

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
may brake unexpectedly or late.
because of its narrow width. The distance to
Vehicles traveling on a different line the vehicle in front will be too short.

Z
180 Driving systems

Obstructions and stationary vehicles Dynamic handling package

General notes
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-

cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals The adjustable damping system adapts to the
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC current driving conditions. The adjustment
PLUS will not brake for these. depends on whether you have selected sport
or comfort mode. Your selection remains
Crossing vehicles stored even if you remove the SmartKey from
the ignition lock.

Sports tuning
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
sports mode ensures even better contact
with the road. Select this mode if you want
more direct contact with the road when
employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on wind-
ing country roads.
X If indicator lamp : is not lit: press but-
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect ton ;.
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- Indicator lamp : lights up. You have selec-
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with ted the suspension for a sporty driving
crossing traffic, for example, could cause style.
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
Comfort tuning
Select comfort mode if you prefer a more
comfortable driving style.
X If indicator lamp : is lit: press but-
ton ;.
Indicator lamp : goes out. You have selec-
ted the suspension for a comfortable driv-
ing style.
 Driving systems 181

HOLD function Activation conditions

General notes You can activate the HOLD function if:

Rthe vehicle is stationary
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
following situations:

Driving and parking

matically switched off by the ECO start/
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep stop function
slopes
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
is fastened
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Rthe hood is closed
The vehicle is kept stationary without the Rthe electric parking brake is released
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD vehicles with automatic transmission
function deactivated when you depress the
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake X Make sure that the activation conditions
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. are met.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- X Depress the brake pedal.
partment, the battery or the fuses have X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
been tampered with. until : HOLD appears in the multifunction
Rthe battery is disconnected display.
There is a risk of an accident. The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle i If depressing the brake pedal the first
against rolling away. time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- Deactivating the HOLD function
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- cally if:
ing or other similar situations: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
Rwhen towing the vehicle transmission: only when the transmission
Rin the car wash is in position D or R.
Ryou shift the transmission to position P on
Deactivating the HOLD function
(Y page 181). vehicles with automatic transmission.

Z
182 Driving systems

Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
amount of pressure until HOLD disappears The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-
from the multifunction display. tion is deactivated.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
i If the engine has been switched off, it
parking brake. cannot be started again until the HOLD
Driving and parking

Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. function has been deactivated.

i After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake. PARKTRONIC
The electric parking brake automatically Important safety notes
secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
activated and: ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's audibly the distance between your vehicle
seat belt is unfastened. and an object.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
matically switched off by the ECO start/ ment for your attention to your immediate
stop function. surroundings. You are always responsible for
Rthe hood is opened. safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
Ra system malfunction occurs. ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
there are no persons, animals or objects in
If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec- the area in which you are maneuvering.
tronics, a warning message may also appear
in the multifunction display. ! When parking, pay particular attention to
Brake Immediately objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-
X Immediately depress the brake firmly until
TRONIC does not detect such objects when
the warning message in the multifunction they are in the immediate vicinity of the
display goes out. vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or
The HOLD function is deactivated. the objects.
In vehicles with automatic transmission: The sensors may not detect snow and other
Shift to 'P'.
'P' objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
X Shift the transmission to position P to pre- Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
vent the vehicle from rolling away. car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
The HOLD function is deactivated. The truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
warning message in the multifunction dis- PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
play disappears. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
The horn will also sound at regular intervals if uneven terrain.
the HOLD function is activated and you: PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's you:
door and remove your seat belt. Rswitch on the ignition
Ropen the hood. Rmove the selector lever to position D, R or
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact N on vehicles with automatic transmission
that the vehicle has been parked while the Rrelease the electric parking brake.
HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
 Driving systems 183

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above

11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper

Driving and parking

and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
Top view
sideration that are:
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
mals or objects.
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang- care not to scratch or damage them
ing loads, truck overhangs or loading (Y page 287).
ramps.
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)

Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
side (example) 80 cm)

Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
Side view the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.

Z
184 Driving systems

Warning displays Automatic transmission:

Transmission Warning display
position
D Front area activated
Driving and parking

R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas

is rolling back- activated
wards
P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

Warning display for the front area
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
vehicle
From the:
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
= Segments showing operational readiness intermittent warning tone for approx-
imately two seconds.
The warning displays show the distance
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning tone for approximately two sec-
warning display for the front area is located
onds. This indicates that you have now
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
reached the minimum distance.
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
ted between the roll bars.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The selector lever position or selected auto-
matic transmission position and the direction
in which the vehicle is rolling determine which
warning display is active when the engine is
running.
Manual transmission:
Gear lever posi- Warning display : Indicator lamp
tion ; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC

Forwards gear If indicator lamp : is on then PARKTRONIC is

Front area activated
deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti-
or vated.
Neutral
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
Reverse gear or Rear and front areas when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the vehicle is rolling activated the ignition lock.
backwards
 Driving systems 185

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 287).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately five seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance G WARNING

If objects are located above the detection
Important safety notes
range, Parking Guidance may provide steering
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid instructions too soon. You may cause a colli-
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas- sion as a result. There is a risk of an accident.
ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A If objects are located above the detection
suitable parking space is indicated by the range, stop and switch off Parking Assist.
parking symbol. You receive steering instruc-
tions when parking. You may also use PARK- ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
TRONIC (Y page 182). obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
replacement for your attention to your imme- the wheels or tires.
diate surroundings. You are always responsi- When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking
ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting Guidance is also unavailable.
a parking space. When maneuvering, parking
Parking Guidance may also display spaces
or pulling out of a parking space, make sure
not suitable for parking, e.g.:
that there are no persons, animals or objects
in the area in which you are maneuvering. Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron unsuitable surfaces

Z
186 Driving systems

Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Detecting parking spaces

Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.
not on the pavement, for example. Parking
Driving and parking

Guidance may not detect flat curbs

Parking tips:
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- : Detected parking space on the left
ing space as possible. ; Parking symbol
RParking spaces that are littered or over- = Detected parking space on the right
grown might be identified or measured
incorrectly. Parking Guidance is automatically activated
when you drive forwards. The system is
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
operational at speeds of up to approximately
by trailer drawbars might not be identified 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
as such or be measured incorrectly. system independently locates and measures
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
space being measured inaccurately. When driving at speeds below 19 mph
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as
(Y page 184) warning messages during the a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
parking procedure. When a parking space has been detected, an
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes arrow towards the right = or the left : also
from your vehicle, you must not use Parking appears. Parking Guidance only displays
Guidance. parking spaces on the front-passenger side
RNever use Parking Guidance with snow as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's
chains or an emergency spare wheel moun- side are displayed as soon as the turn signal
ted. on the driver's side is activated. To park on
RMake sure that the tire pressures are the driver's side, you must leave the driver's
always correct. This has a direct effect on side turn signal switched on until you have
the steering instructions. engaged reverse gear.
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the Parking Guidance will only detect parking
parking space after parking is dependent spaces:
on various factors. These include the posi- Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide
front and behind it and the conditions of the Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than
location. In some cases, Parking Guidance your vehicle
may guide you too far or not far enough into
a parking space. In some cases, it may also A parking space is displayed while you are
lead you across or onto the curb. If neces- driving past it, and until you are approx-
sary, cancel the parking procedure with imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking Guidance.
 Driving systems 187

Parking Backing up into the parking space

Moving the vehicle into the stop position

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in

Driving and parking

the instrument cluster.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to
reverse gear.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift
into position R.
The multifunction display shows the
Check Vehicle Surroundings Press
'OK' to Confirm message. X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel in the specified direction
until the arrow is white and a warning tone
sounds.
X To reverse into the parking space: main-
tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
carefully.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
The vehicle has reached the position in
which you need to countersteer.
The Please Steer Wheel to the Right
or Please Steer Wheel to the Left
X Press the a button on the multifunction message appears in the multifunction dis-
steering wheel to confirm. play.
The multifunction display switches to Park- X To countersteer: while the vehicle is sta-
ing Guidance. tionary, turn the steering wheel in the
Depending on your distance from the park- specified direction until the arrow is white
ing space, the Please Drive Backward and a warning tone sounds.
message will appear in the multifunction X To reverse into the parking space: main-
display. tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
X If necessary, reverse towards the parking carefully.
space. This is indicated by an arrow point- X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, at
ing backwards. the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the
Continue backing up until you hear a tone. continuous warning tone.
Stop – the stop position has been reached. The Parking Guidance Finished mes-
The arrow is white. sage appears in the multifunction display
The Please Steer Wheel to the Right and a tone sounds. You may be asked to
or Please Steer Wheel to the Left steer in a different direction and then
message appears in the multifunction dis- change gear. In this case, further displays
play. in the multifunction display will direct you
to the final position.

Z
188 Driving systems

X Maneuver if necessary. Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style

X Always observe the warning messages dis- with high cornering speeds or high rates of
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 184). acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower

Canceling Parking Guidance than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than

Driving and parking

112 mph (180 km/h)

X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen- Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak-
ter console (Y page 184). ing a telephone call with it
Parking Guidance is canceled immediately
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
and PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
Rin active driving situations, such as when
Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if you change lanes or change your speed
it is no longer possible to guide you into the
parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
The parking space symbol goes out and a or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐ recognize them at all. The system is not a
ance Canceled message appears in the mul- substitute for a well-rested and attentive
tifunction display. driver.

Warning and display messages in the

ATTENTION ASSIST
multifunction display
Important safety notes X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, board computer (Y page 203).
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
It is active in the range between 50 mph warned no sooner than 20 minutes after
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). your journey has begun. You then hear an
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica- intermittent warning tone twice and the
tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- Attention Assist: Take a Break!
centration on the part of the driver, it sug- message appears in the multifunction dis-
gests you take a break. play.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of X If necessary, take a break.
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking X Press the a or % button to confirm
the following criteria into account: the message.
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
characteristics time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST
of journey still detects increasing lapses in concentra-
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is tion, you will be warned again after
restricted and warnings may be delayed or 15 minutes at the earliest.
not occur at all: ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-
tinue your journey and starts assessing your
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
tiredness again if:
face is uneven or if there are potholes
Ryou switch off the engine.
Rif there is a strong side wind
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
 Driving systems 189

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the sensor is intended for use in an automotive
é symbol appears in the multifunction radar system only. Removing, tampering
display in the assistance graphics display. with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Driving Assistance package

Driving and parking

any non-approved way.
General notes Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
The Driving Assistance package consists of operate the equipment.
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171), Blind Spot
Assist (Y page 189) and Lane Keeping Assist Monitoring range of the sensors
(Y page 190).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the moni-
tored area. If you then switch on the corre-
sponding turn signal to change lanes, you will
also receive a visual and audible collision
warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the
rear bumper for monitoring purposes.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
sensor system must be operational. (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next
to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For
Important safety notes this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar
G WARNING sensors in the rear bumper.
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
placing them in the blind spot area
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
the case if there are vehicles driving at the
differential and overtake your vehicle inner edge of their lanes.
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give Due to the nature of the system:
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident. Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-

Always observe the traffic conditions care-

ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
i USA only: extended period next to long vehicles, such
This device has been approved by the FCC as trucks.
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar

Z
190 Driving systems

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist Collision warning
are integrated into the sides of the rear If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. corresponding turn signal, a double warning
The sensors must not be covered, for exam- tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
Driving and parking

ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol- the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam- are indicated by the flashing of red warning
age to the bumpers, have the function of the lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise Switching on Blind Spot Assist
not work properly. X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 207) and Blind Spot Assist
Indicator and warning display (Y page 204) are activated in the on-board
computer.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-
low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-
tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is
operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
sponding side lights up red. This warning is Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
always emitted when a vehicle enters the front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
blind spot monitoring range from behind or mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
the warning only occurs if the difference in road and warns you before you leave your
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). lane unintentionally.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse If you select km on the on-board computer in
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func-
Assist is no longer active. tion (Y page 204), Lane Keeping Assist is
The brightness of the indicator/warning active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the
lamps is adjusted automatically according to miles display unit is selected, the assistance
the ambient light. range begins at 40 mph.
 Driving systems 191

A warning may be given if a front wheel Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
means of intermittent vibration in the steer- vicinity of the camera
ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-

Important safety notes ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-

Driving and parking

struction work
G WARNING Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
recognize lane markings. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Rgive an unnecessary warning detected
Rnot give a warning Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

There is a risk of an accident. lanes branch off, cross one another or

merge
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
Rthe road is narrow and winding
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

G WARNING
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
the on-board computer; to do so, select
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 204).
a risk of an accident.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
You should always steer, brake or accelerate (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- the lines in the assistance graphics display
ing Assist. (Y page 203) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of Standard
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
occurs if:
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in the warnings are suppressed for a certain
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good period of time.
time and for staying in your lane. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the ABS, BAS or ESP®.
vehicle in the lane. Adaptive
The system may be impaired or may not func- When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion if: tion occurs if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
cient illumination of the road, or due to the warnings are suppressed for a certain
snow, rain, fog or spray period of time.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road ABS, BAS or ESP®.
surface is wet) Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.

Z
192 Driving systems

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an

obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Driving and parking

marking, the system recognizes certain con-

ditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-
way.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
 193

Useful information ............................ 194

On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes .................... 194
Displays and operation .................... 194
Menus and submenus ...................... 197
Display messages ............................. 212
Warning and indicator lamps .......... 244
194 Displays and operation

Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-

On-board computer and displays

ating safely may cause an accident.

i This Operator's manual describes all If the operating safety of your vehicle is
models and all standard and optional equip- impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
ment of your vehicle available at the time of so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
publication of the Operator's manual. For an overview, see the instrument panel
Country-specific differences are possible. illustration (Y page 31).
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and Displays and operation
functions.
Instrument cluster lighting
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 26). The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-
Important safety notes trol knob.
The brightness control knob is on the bottom
G WARNING left of the instrument cluster (Y page 31).
If you operate information systems and com- X Turn the brightness control knob counter-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- clockwise or clockwise.
cle while driving, you will be distracted from If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
traffic conditions. You could also lose control L, the brightness is dependent upon
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. the brightness of the ambient light.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
situation permits. If you are not sure that this automatically controls the brightness of
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention the multifunction display.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
cluster are not lit.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer. Coolant temperature display

G WARNING G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- Opening the hood when the engine is over-
functioned, you may not recognize function heated or when there is a fire in the engine
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The compartment could expose you to hot gases
operating safety of your vehicle may be or other service products. There is a risk of
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. injury.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked Let an overheated engine cool down before
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
ately. engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the mul- ! A display message is shown if the coolant
tifunction display. You should therefore make temperature is too high.
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
 Displays and operation 195

If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ The segments between the speed of the

On-board computer and displays

(120 †), do not continue driving. The vehicle in front and the stored speed light
engine will otherwise be damaged. up.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 31). Operating the on-board computer
Under normal operating conditions and with Overview
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez- : Multifunction display
ing point. ; Right control panel
Bear in mind that the outside temperature = Left control panel
display indicates the temperature measured
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
and does not record the road temperature.
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
The outside temperature display is in the mul- lock.
tifunction display (Y page 196).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- You can control the multifunction display and
played after a short delay. the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 169):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 171):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

Z
196 Displays and operation

Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

On-board computer and displays

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute

9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate oper-
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: ating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial

: RIn
memory
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits phone book/redial mem-
ory
6 RMakes or accepts a call Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
RSwitches to the redial memory : Transmission position (Y page 151)
; Drive program (Y page 151)
= Text field
? Menu bar
 Menus and submenus 197

A Time RAudio menu (Y page 200)

On-board computer and displays

B Outside temperature or speed RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 201)
(Y page 205) RDriveAssist menu (assistance)

Text field = shows the selected menu or (Y page 203)

submenu as well as display messages. RServ menu (Y page 204)

X To show menu bar ?: press the = RSett menu (settings) (Y page 204)
or ; button on the steering wheel. RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 208)
Menu bar ? disappears after a few sec-
onds of inactivity.
Trip menu
i You can set the time using COMAND; see
the separate operating instructions. Standard display
Vehicles with manual transmission:
instead of transmission position : and drive
program ;, the time and the outside tem-
perature or speed are shown.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
Z Gearshift recommendation for man-
ual transmission (Y page 151) or X Press and hold the % button on the
when shifting manually (automatic steering wheel until the Trip menu with
transmission) (Y page 154) trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 185)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 169)
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Reset"
(Y page 113)
è ECO start/stop function
(Y page 143)
ë HOLD function (Y page 181)

Menus and submenus

Menu overview Example: trip computer "From Start"
: Distance
Press the = or ; button on the steer- ; Time
ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select a
= Average speed
menu.
? Average fuel consumption
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 195). X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Depending on the equipment installed in the ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: X Press the 9 or : button to select

RTrip
From Start or From Reset.
Reset
menu (Y page 197)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) The values in the From Start submenu are
(Y page 199) calculated from the start of a journey whilst

Z
198 Menus and submenus

the values in the From Reset submenu are X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
On-board computer and displays

calculated from the last time the submenu ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
was reset (Y page 198). X Press the 9 or : button to select the
The From Start trip computer is automati- current fuel consumption (not for AMG
cally reset when: vehicles) and the approximate range.
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more The approximate range that can be covered
than four hours. depends on the fuel level and your current
R999 hours have been exceeded. driving style. If there is only a small amount of
R9,999 miles have been exceeded. fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a
The From Reset trip computer is automati- vehicle being refueled C instead of the
cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or range.
99,999 miles.
Digital speedometer
ECO display

: Gearshift recommendation, manual trans-

Example: ECO display
mission (Y page 151) or automatic trans-
mission (Y page 154)
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ; Digital speedometer
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Gearshift recommendation : is not given on
ECO DISPLAY.
DISPLAY AMG vehicles.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
matically reset.
digital speedometer.
For further information on the ECO display,
see (Y page 165).
Resetting values
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
 Menus and submenus 199

X Press the a button. Route guidance active

On-board computer and displays

X Press the : button to select Yes and
No change of direction announced
press the a button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
RTripodometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
: Distance to the destination
i If you reset the values in the ECO display, ; Distance to the next change of direction
the values in the "From start" trip computer = Current road
are also reset. If you reset the values in the
? "Follow the road's course" symbol
"From start" trip computer, the values in
the ECO display are also reset. Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information on navigation, see the separate
operating instructions. : Road into which the change of direction
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate leads
operating instructions). ; Distance to change of direction and visual
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- distance display
ing wheel to select the Navi menu. = Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you
Route guidance not active will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indi-
cator shortens towards the top of the display
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction.

: Direction of travel
; Current road

Z
200 Menus and submenus

Change of direction announced with a Audio menu

On-board computer and displays

lane recommendation
Selecting a radio station

: Road into which the change of direction

leads : Waveband
; Distance to change of direction and visual ; Station frequency with memory position
distance display i Station ; is displayed with the station
= Recommended lane and new lane during a frequency or station name. The memory
change of direction position is only displayed along with sta-
? Lanes not recommended tion ; if this has been stored.
A Recommended lane X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
B Change-of-direction symbol and select Radio; see the separate operat-
On multilane roads, lane recommendations ing instructions.
can be displayed for the next change of direc- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
tion if the digital map supports this data. Dur- ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
ing the change of direction, new lanes may be X To select a stored station: briefly press
added. the 9 or : button.
Recommended lane and new lane during a X To select a station from the station list:
change of direction =: in this lane you will be press and briefly hold the 9 or :
able to complete the next two changes of button.
direction without changing lane.
If no station list is received:
Lane not recommended ?: you will not be X To select a station using the station
able to complete the next change of direction
search: press and briefly hold the 9
if you stay in this lane.
or : button.
Recommended lane A: in this lane, you will
only be able to complete the next change of i For information on changing waveband
direction without changing lane. and storing stations, see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Other status indicators of the naviga- i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
tion system normal radio.
RO: you have reached the destination or an For more information on satellite radio
intermediate destination. operation, see the separate operating
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:Route instructions.
calculating a new route.
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road Road: the vehicle
position is outside the area of the digital
map (off-map position).
RNo Route:
Route no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
 Menus and submenus 201

Operating an audio player or audio X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;

On-board computer and displays

media see the separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene : has
Example: CD/DVD changer display been reached.
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle. Telephone menu
X Switch on COMAND and activate audio CD Introduction
mode or MP3 mode; see the separate oper-
ating instructions. G WARNING
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If you operate information systems and com-
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
X To select the next/previous track: cle while driving, you will be distracted from
briefly press the 9 or : button. traffic conditions. You could also lose control
X To select a track from the track list of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 Only operate the equipment when the traffic
or : button until desired track : has situation permits. If you are not sure that this
been reached. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this When telephoning, you must observe the
function. legal requirements for the country in which
If track information is stored on the audio you are currently driving.
device or medium, the multifunction display X Switch on your mobile phone and
will show the number and title of the track. COMAND, see the separate operating
The current track does not appear in audio instructions.
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to
audio source connected).
COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions.
Video DVD operation
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.

Example: CD/DVD changer display

Z
202 Menus and submenus

You will see one of the following display mes- X Press the 9 or : button to select the
On-board computer and displays

sages in the multifunction display: desired name.

RPhone READY or the name of the network or
provider: the mobile phone has found a X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
network and is ready to receive. the 9 or : button for longer than
RPhone No Service:
Service there is no network one second.
available or the mobile phone is searching Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
for a network. button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
Accepting a call for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
Example: incoming call X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
X Press the 6 button on the steering ing.
wheel to accept an incoming call. or
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or
menu, a display message appears in the mul- % button.
tifunction display.
You can accept a call even if you are not in the Redialing
Tel menu.
The on-board computer saves the last names
Rejecting or ending a call or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the ~ button on the steering
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
wheel.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
You can end or reject a call even if you are not redial memory.
in the Tel menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
Dialing an entry from the phone book
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ing.
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. or
X Press the 9, : or a button to X To exit the redial memory: press the
switch to the phone book. ~ or % button.
 Menus and submenus 203

Assistance menu The assistance graphic displays the status of

On-board computer and displays

and information from the following driving
Introduction systems or driving safety systems:
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188)
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 190)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67)

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
Brake
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the fol- PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
lowing options: with DISTRONIC PLUS.
RDisplaying the assistance graphic X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
(Y page 203) to select the DriveAssist menu.
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake X Press the 9 or : button to select
(Y page 203) PRE-SAFE Brake.
Brake
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION X Press the a button.
ASSIST (Y page 203) The current selection is displayed.
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X To activate/deactivate: press the a
(Y page 204) button again.
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping When the PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated,
Assist (Y page 204) the multifunction display in the assistance
graphic shows the æ symbol.
Displaying the assistance graphic For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 67).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
ATTENTION ASSIST.
ASSIST
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X To activate/deactivate: press the a
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. button again.
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,
Graphic.
Graphic the é symbol appears in the multifunc-
X Press the a button. tion display in the assistance graphics dis-
The multifunction display shows the DIS- play.
TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis- For further information about ATTENTION
tance graphic. ASSIST, see (Y page 188).

Z
204 Menus and submenus

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot RCalling up display messages

On-board computer and displays

Assist (Y page 212)

RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. system (Y page 318)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist.
Assist (Y page 318)
RCalling up the service due date
X Press the a button.
The current selection is displayed. (Y page 283)
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again. Settings menu
Further information about Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 189) Introduction

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep‐
ing Assist.
Assist
In the Sett menu, you have the following
X Press the a button.
options:
The current selection is displayed.
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
X Press a to confirm.
(Y page 204)
X Press : or 9 to set Off Off, Standard RChanging the light settings (Y page 205)
or Adaptive
Adaptive.
RChanging the vehicle settings
X Press the a button to save the setting.
(Y page 207)
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
RChanging the convenience settings
multifunction display shows the lane mark-
(Y page 207)
ings as bright lines in the assistance
RRestoring the factory settings
graphic.
(Y page 208)
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 190). Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-
Maintenance menu tance
You can determine whether the multifunction
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
In the Service menu, you have the following
X Press a to confirm.
options:
 Menus and submenus 205

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Selecting the permanent display function

On-board computer and displays

Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- You can determine whether the multifunction
tion. display permanently shows your speed or the
You will see the selected setting: km or outside temperature.
miles.
miles
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the a button to save the setting.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
The selected unit of measurement for dis- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
tance applies to: Instrument Cluster submenu.
RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu X Press a to confirm.
ROdometer and the trip odometer X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RTrip computer Permanent Display function.
RCurrent consumption and the range You will see the selected setting Outside
Temperature or Additional Speedome‐
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
ter [km/h]/Additional
[km/h] Additional Speedometer
RCruise control
[mph].
[mph]
RDISTRONIC PLUS X Press the a button to save the setting.
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
i The speed is highlighted in km/h or in
Switching the additional speedometer mph conversely to your speedometer.
on/off
Only vehicles with manual transmission have Lights
this function.
Setting the daytime running lamps
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. i This function is not available in Canada.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Instrument Cluster submenu. ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu.

Additional Speedometer [mph] func- X Press a to confirm.
tion. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
You will see the selected setting: On or Off
Off. Daytime Running Lights function.
X Press the a button to save the setting. If the Daytime Running Lights function
has been switched on, the cone of light and
i Speed is displayed in mph. the W symbol in the multifunction dis-
The Additional Speedometer [mph] func- play are shown in orange.
tion allows you to choose whether the status X Press the a button to save the setting.
area in the multifunction display always Further information on daytime running
shows the speed in mph instead of the outside lamps (Y page 109).
temperature.
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu.

Z
206 Menus and submenus

X Press a to confirm. the surround lighting is switched off and

On-board computer and displays

X Press the : or 9 button to select the automatic headlamp mode is activated

Amb. Light +/- function. (Y page 109).
You will see the selected setting. Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
X Press a to confirm. exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the after the engine is switched off. If you close
brightness to a level from Off to Level 5 all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
(bright). lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
X Press the a or % button to save the i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
setting. when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-
Activating/deactivating surround light- lowing light up:
ing and exterior lighting delayed switch- RParking lamps
off
RFront fog lamps
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RLow-beam headlamps
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
RDaytime running lamps
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RSide marker lamps
Light submenu.
X Press a to confirm. RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Activating/deactivating the interior light-

Surround Lighting function. ing delayed switch-off
When the Surround Lighting function is If you activate the Interior Lighting
activated, the light cone and the area Delay function, the interior lighting remains
around the vehicle are displayed in orange on for 20 seconds after you remove the
in the multifunction display. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte- ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
rior lighting temporarily: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart- Lights submenu.
Key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press a to confirm.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
tion lock. Interior Lighting Delay function.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is If the Interior Lighting Delay function
deactivated. has been switched on, the vehicle interior is
displayed in orange in the multifunction
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
display.
reactivated the next time you start the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
engine.
If you have activated the Surround Light‐
ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
 Menus and submenus 207

Vehicle X Press a to confirm.

On-board computer and displays

X Press the 9 or : button to select
Activating/deactivating the automatic
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
Manual):
door locking mechanism
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- or Disabled
Disabled.
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu. The following systems are switched off when
the radar sensor system is deactivated:
X Press a to confirm.
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171)
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock function. RBAS PLUS (Y page 62)

When the Automatic Door Lock function RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67)
is activated, the left-hand vehicle door is
displayed in orange in the multifunction Convenience
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above G WARNING
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
For further information on the automatic lock- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
ing feature, see (Y page 79). occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Activating/deactivating the acoustic While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
locking verification signal ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, any body parts in the sweep of the steering
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the wheel.
vehicle. If somebody becomes trapped:
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Rpress one of the memory function position
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. buttons, or
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-
Vehicle submenu. ment in the opposite direction to that in
X Press a to confirm. which the steering wheel is moving.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the The adjustment process is stopped.
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
the & symbol in the multifunction dis- ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
play lights up orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
system
Easy Entry/Exit function.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed
X Press the : or 9 button to select the in orange in the multifunction display.
Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z
208 Menus and submenus

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT displayed in orange in the multifunction

On-board computer and displays

feature (Y page 101). display.

X Press the a button to save the setting.
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett menu. Restoring the factory settings
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Convenience submenu. ing wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu.
Belt Adjustment function. X Press a to confirm.
When the Belt Adjustment function is The Reset All Settings? message
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed appears.
in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the : or 9 button to select No
X Press the a button to save the setting. or Yes
Yes.
For further information on belt adjustment, X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
see (Y page 45). tion.
If you have selected Yes
Yes, the multifunction
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- display shows a confirmation message.
ing feature on/off
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
This function is only available on vehicles with Lights function in the Light submenu is only
the memory function (Y page 106). reset if the vehicle is stationary.
This function is only available in Canada.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐
ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded AMG menu in AMG vehicles
in when the vehicle is locked.
AMG displays
If you unlock the vehicle and then open a
door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(Y page 104), they will not fold out automat-
ically. The exterior mirrors can then only be
folded out using the button on the door.
: Digital speedometer
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
; Gear indicator
ing wheel to select the Sett menu.
= Upshift indicator
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu. ? Engine oil temperature
X Press a to confirm.
A Coolant temperature
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
B Transmission fluid temperature
Auto. Mirror Folding function. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is to select the AMG menu.
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range
when in the manual gearshift program.
 Menus and submenus 209

Upshift indicator UP = fades out other You can start the RACETIMER when the

On-board computer and displays

messages until you have shifted up. engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-
If the engine oil temperature is below tion 2 in the ignition lock.
160 ‡ (71 †), oil temperature ? is shown X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output to select the AMG menu.
during this time. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
If the transmission fluid temperature is RACETIMER is shown.
below 122 ‡ (50 †), oil temperature B is X To start: press the a button to start the
shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine
RACETIMER.
output during this time.
Displaying the intermediate time
SETUP

X Press the = or ; button to select

: Drive program (C
C/SS/MM) Interm. Time.
Time
; ESP® mode (ON
ON/OFF
OFF) or SPORT handling X Press a to confirm.
mode (SPORT
SPORT) The intermediate time is displayed for five
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® seconds.
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the Starting a new lap
SPORT handling mode.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER
: RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap)
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a = Lap
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
Lap
i It is possible to store a maximum of six-
teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-
pleted with Finish Lap.
Lap

: Lap
; RACETIMER

Z
210 Menus and submenus

Stopping the RACETIMER Overall statistics

On-board computer and displays

X Press the % button on the steering : RACETIMER overall evaluation

wheel. ; Total time driven
X Press a to confirm Yes
Yes. = Average speed
The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you ? Distance covered
stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to A Maximum speed
position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the This function is shown if you have stored at
SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
a to confirm StartStart, timing is continued.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Resetting the current lap to select the AMG menu.
X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Press the = or ; button to select overall evaluation is shown.
Reset Lap.
Lap
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Lap statistics

Deleting all laps

: Lap
; Lap time
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is = Average lap speed
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are ? Lap length
deleted.
A Top speed during lap
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
does not have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap.
X Press a to confirm Reset Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-
function display.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
 Menus and submenus 211

This function is only available if you have

On-board computer and displays

stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.

Z
212 Display messages

Display messages
On-board computer and displays

Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 181)
RParking (Y page 161)

Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.

Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
 Display messages 213

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill
Currently Unavail‐ start assist are temporarily unavailable.
able See Opera‐
tor's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start
assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.

Z
214 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-

ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
temporarily unavailable.
Currently Unavail‐
able See Opera‐ BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
tor's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 215

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
÷ to a malfunction.
Inoperative See BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 162).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking Brake

Z
216 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking
brake (Y page 162).

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only)
X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/!

(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency
release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate
slightly more when pulling away.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric
parking brake automatically (Y page 162).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 217

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 333).
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
218 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

X Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency
release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate
slightly more when pulling away.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric
parking brake automatically (Y page 162).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/!
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch off the ignition.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically.
You can release the electrical parking brake with the emergency
release; to do so insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and
accelerate slightly more when pulling away.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P as the electric parking brake is not being applied automat-
ically.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

i If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied,

leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the vehicle in
an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed. Excep-
tion: when having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised
(Y page 305).
 Display messages 219

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake Inop‐ The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
erative voltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA

only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission
to P.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
only) tion was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
the Parking Brake

Z
220 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

$(USA A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DIS-

TRONIC PLUS is active.
only)J(Canada A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock
only) the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
Brake Immediately You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it
(Y page 161).
You can restart the engine.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Brake Pad
Wear

G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-

tioning.
mbrace Inoperative
X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages 221

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

PRE-SAFE PRE‑SAFE® Brake is deactivated or temporarily inoperative. Pos-
Functions Cur‐ sible causes are:
rently Limited See Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Operator's Manual Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper
(Y page 287).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 65).

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS or

Functions Limited the distance warning signal may also have failed.
See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ual

6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights

up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about the restraint system, see

(Y page 40).

Z
222 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or

right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Front Left Malfunc‐ ter.
tion Service
Required or Front G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required The left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionally
or Right Side Cur‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
tain Airbag Mal‐ There is an increased risk of injury.
function Service
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Required
 Display messages 223

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Front-Passenger The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
Airbag Disabled deactivated during the journey, although:
See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult
ual or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag
may not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up
and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated
the front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.

Z
224 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 49).

Front-Passenger The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
Airbag Enabled enabled during the journey, even though:
See Operator's Man‐ Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
ual tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
may be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the fol-
lowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up
and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated
the front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐
 Display messages 225

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the
multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 49).

Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Corner‐
(Y page 115).
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering or
Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Low
(Y page 115).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Rear Left
(Y page 115).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
226 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Front Left
(Y page 115).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal

b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Center Brake
Lamp

b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Brake
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp

b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps

b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left High
(Y page 115).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
License Plate Lamp

b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Left Fog
Lamp or Check
Right Fog Lamp
 Display messages 227

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The rear fog lamp is defective.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Fog Lamp

b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Front Left
(Y page 115).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The backup lamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Backup Light
(Y page 115).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp

b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp

b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Daytime
(Y page 115).
Running Light or
Check Right Day‐ or
time Running Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The active light function is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative

b The exterior lighting is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual

Z
228 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The light sensor is defective.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights
X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist Currently ative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.

X Clean the windshield.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-
played.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The coolant level is too low.

Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See Opera‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
tor's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 281).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
 Display messages 229

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

# The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.
See Operator's Man‐
ual Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
230 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level
is too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Observe the instructions in the display message # See
Operator's Manual.
Manual
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
Start Engine See
the rear window defroster and interior lighting.
Operator's Manual
X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis-
tance.
The battery is being charged.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.
Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level at the latest when next refueling
At Next Refueling
(Y page 279).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 280).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

Check the oil level at the latest when next refueling
X
Check Engine Oil
(Y page 279).
Level (Add 1 quart)
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 280).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
 Display messages 231

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break!
X If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.

À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attention Assist
Inoperative

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 181).

Radar Sensors Deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated.

tivated See Opera‐ X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 207).
tor's Manual

Z
232 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

Assist Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Currently Unavail‐ Rthe sensors are dirty.
able See Opera‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
tor's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Clean the sensors (Y page 287).
X Restart the engine.
 Display messages 233

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 185).

Inoperative X Restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are:

Canceled Rthe vehicle is skidding.
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Ra malfunction has occurred.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 185).

If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction

display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):
X Clean the sensors (Y page 287).
X Restart the engine.

If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunc-
tion display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer

following the recommended path.
X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in
the multifunction display.

Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Finished The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 171).
If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
Available rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 171).

Z
234 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
rently Unavailable Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Operator's Man‐
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty.
ual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper
(Y page 287).
X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be
inoperative as well.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 171).
 Display messages 235

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.
Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 169).

Z
236 Display messages

Tires
On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Canada only:
Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 292).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-
sure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 318).

Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Then Restart Run The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
Flat Indicator sage and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 318).

Run Flat Indicator Canada only:

Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 318).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 321).
 Display messages 237

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tires The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 292).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 318).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 292).

Z
238 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Tire Pressure Mon‐ Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
itor from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Currently Unavail‐ malfunctioning.
able X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.

TirePress. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
itor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
No Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.

Tire Pressure Mon‐ The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

itor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
to Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
 Display messages 239

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Risk of Rolling G WARNING
Transmission Not You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
in P opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
or
You have turned off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door while the transmission was in position N.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:

Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the hood
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock
the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
You can restart the engine.

Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Z
240 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Clutch Overheated The clutch is under considerable load and the permitted operating
Avoid Pulling Away temperature has been exceeded. A warning tone also sounds.
Engage/Diseng. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over lon-
Clutch Quickly if ger distances.
Required X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Leave the engine running.
The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running.
or
X If possible, continue driving at a steady speed.
X Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow the
clutch to slip.
The clutch may also cool down during the journey.
It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutch
has cooled down, the display message disappears. The clutch is
fully operational again.

N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
 Display messages 241

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Oper‐ G WARNING
ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

J The trunk partition is open.

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 90).
Trunk Partition
Open
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/
receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.

K You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Decrease Speed
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the roof (Y page 88).

K The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depres-
surized.
Vario-Roof Lower‐
X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 88).
ing

K The roof is not locked.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Open/Close Vario-
attention to road and traffic conditions.
Roof Completely
X Push or pull the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed
(Y page 88).

K The on-board voltage is too low.

X Start the engine.
Start Engine See
X After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closing
Operator's Manual
procedure (Y page 88).

Z
242 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The
roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.
You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten
minutes.
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 88).

Close Rear You leave the vehicle and at least one of the rear side windows is
Side Windows open.
X Close the rear side windows (Y page 84).

¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid
X Add washer fluid (Y page 281).

Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

 You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle

 The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition

 The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Obtain a New Key

 The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 75).
Replace Key Battery
 Display messages 243

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

 The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.

 The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.
Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
Key Not Detected
functions in the vehicle.
(white display mes-
sage) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

 The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-
Remove 'Start' But‐ ing tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
244 Warning and indicator lamps

Warning and indicator lamps

On-board computer and displays

Safety
Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a warn-
ing tone sounds for up
to 6 seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being

driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
 Warning and indicator lamps 245

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- There is a risk of an accident.
ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-
function.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-

The yellow ABS warning tion. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability
lamp is lit while the Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and
engine is running. hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.

Z
246 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (elec-

The yellow ABS warning tronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the
lamp is lit while the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
engine is running. example.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosisis not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps 247

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
lamp is lit while the tion and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.
engine is running. A ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
warning tone also
sounds. G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
J (Canada only) BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
֌! function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamp, the yellow ESP® G WARNING
and ESP® OFF warning
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
lamps and the yellow
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
ABS warning lamp are
lock if you brake hard, for example.
lit while the engine is
running. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
248 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 64).

å ESP® is deactivated.
®
The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 64).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Drive on carefully.
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M SPORT handling mode is activated.

AMG vehicles only: G WARNING
The yellow SPORT han-
dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
lamp is lit while the stabilize the vehicle.
engine is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations
(Y page 65).
 Warning and indicator lamps 249

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
The yellow ESP® and function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamps are lit while the
G WARNING
engine is running.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
The yellow ESP® and temporarily unavailable.
ESP® OFF warning BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
250 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

! (Canada only) display.
The red electric parking
brake indicator lamp
flashes or lights up
and/or
!
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
6 The restraint system is faulty.
The red restraint sys- G WARNING
tem warning lamp is lit
while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
ning. gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see
(Y page 40).
 Warning and indicator lamps 251

Engine

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the
Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be
in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-
ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp
lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal require-
ments. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in
the state in which you are currently driving.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is run-
ning.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion. cap.
In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-
Check Engine warning shop.
lamp may light up.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
The red coolant warn- defective.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
perature gauge is at the paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
252 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may
ing lamp comes on be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-
while the engine is run- tioning.
ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 281).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-
The red coolant warn- flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may
ing lamp comes on be too low.
while the engine is run- G WARNING
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
 Warning and indicator lamps 253

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 281).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed.
ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately.
the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
A warning tone also brake or take evasive action.
sounds.
Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171).
Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 67).

Z
254 Warning and indicator lamps

Tires
On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 292).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 318).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 255

Useful information ............................ 256

Stowage areas .................................. 256
Features ............................................. 258

Stowage and features

256 Stowage areas

Useful information Glove box

i This Operator's manual describes all

models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
Stowage and features

also applies to safety-related systems and

functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 26). X To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
Stowage areas until it engages.
Stowage space The glove box flap contains brackets for
coins, pens, and credit and service cards.
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
ing or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
The glove box can be locked and unlocked
trude from stowage compartments, parcel using the mechanical key.
nets or stowage nets.
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
RClose lockable stowage compartments
lock and turn it to position 2.
while driving.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
the lock and turn it to position 1.
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
 Stowage areas 257

Stowage compartment/telephone Stowage compartment in the center

compartment under the armrest console

Stowage and features

X To open: push button : up and raise arm- X To open: briefly press the lower section of
rest ;. cover :.
The stowage compartment can be locked and X To remove the insert: pull the left-hand
unlocked centrally using the SmartKey side of the insert up and out.
(Y page 72). X To install the insert: press the insert into

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a the housing.

12 V power socket, USB port or a Media Depending on the vehicle equipment, there
Interface is installed in the stowage com- may be an ashtray in the center console
partment. A Media Interface is a universal instead of a storage compartment.
interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g.
for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the sepa- Stowage compartment in the doors
rate COMAND Operating Instructions).

Eyeglasses compartment

In the door trim, there is a ruffled pocket ;

with storage slot :.

X To open: press marking :. Stowage box in the rear wall between

the seats
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. A ruffled pocket is located on the rear wall
between the seats.

Z
258
Stowage and features Features

: Ruffled pocket Attached to the reversible floor panel are two

flexible straps ; that you can use to secure
objects, for example wind screen =, when
Stowage net reversible floor panel : has been turned
Stowage nets are located in the front- over.
passenger footwell and on the rear wall
behind the driver's seat.
Roof carrier
! This vehicle is not designed to transport
Reversible floor panel in the trunk items on the roof. Roof carriers and other
Using the flat side of the reversible floor panel devices which are mounted on the roof that
will give you a level trunk. If you turn the have not been specifically approved for this
reversible floor panel over, you can transport model by Mercedes-Benz must not be used
objects, for example a drinks crate, on it. as they could damage the vehicle and the
retractable hardtop (vario-roof).
At the time of going to print, Mercedes-
Benz does not offer any roof carrier or other
roof-installed devices for this model.
! This vehicle is not designed to transport
any items on the trunk lid or to allow lug-
gage carriers or equipment of any kind to
be installed to the trunk lid. Otherwise the
vehicle and the retractable hardtop could
be damaged.
X To turn over: pull up reversible floor
panel ; using strap :. Features
X Turn over reversible floor panel ; and re-
insert it. Cup holder
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
 Features 259

There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- Bottle holder

ing or abruptly changing directions.
Observe the "Important safety notes" in the
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
"Stowage compartments" section
flung around in these or in similar situa- (Y page 256).
tions.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
! Make sure that any bottles weighing more
trude from stowage compartments, parcel than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the
nets or stowage nets. bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The
bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
RClose lockable stowage compartments

Stowage and features

while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the center console

X Press the outer edge of button : and slide
in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.

The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a

capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;
it merely prevents them from tipping over.

X To open: slide cover ; back. Sun visors

X To remove the insert: slide catch : Overview
inwards on both sides in the direction of the
arrow. G WARNING
X Remove the cup holder insert upwards. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
X To re-install the insert: place the insert in up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
the stowage space. blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of
the arrow until it engages. Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
You can remove the cup holder insert for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water
only.

Z
260 Features

Ashtray
Stowage and features

: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket
X To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
? Vanity mirror
The cover opens.
A Mirror cover
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ;
i When driving at high speeds with the side and out.
window or roof open: X To re-install the insert: press insert =
If you have inserted a car park ticket into into the holder until it engages.
retaining strip =, make sure that it is not
blown away by the wind.
Cigarette lighter
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
G WARNING
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
has been folded up.
lighter.
Glare from the side In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
X Fold down the sun visor.
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
objects, for example
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
 Features 261

ensures that there is sufficient power to

start the engine.

Socket under the armrest

Stowage and features

Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Open the stowage compartment under the
tion lock (Y page 139). armrest (Y page 257).
X To open: push the lower section of X Lift up the cover of socket :.
cover :.
The ashtray opens. On vehicles without ashtrays or lighters, there
is an additional socket in the center console.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
Socket in the front-compartment center
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
console

12 V sockets
General notes
! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle,
make sure that you do not exceed the max-
imum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise, you
will overload the fuses.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 139).
The sockets can be used for accessories with X To open: push the lower section of
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- cover :.
ries include such items as lamps or chargers The stowage compartment opens.
for mobile phones. X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge. mbrace
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the General notes
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power You must have a license agreement to acti-
to the sockets is automatically cut. This vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your

Z
262 Features

system is activated and operational. To log in, The system offers various services, e.g.:
press the ï MB Info call button. If any of RAutomatic and manual emergency call
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the
RRoadside Assistance call
system may not be activated.
RMB Info call
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot- USA only: you can find information and a
lines: description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes System self-test
Stowage and features

(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at After you have switched on the ignition, the
1-888-923-8367 system carries out a self-diagnosis.
Shortly after successfully registering with the A malfunction in the system has been detec-
service, a user ID and password will be sent to ted if one of the following occurs:
you by post. RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
USA only: you can use this password to log not come on during the system self-test.
onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
at http://www.mbusa.com. Assistance button does not light up during
The system is available if: self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
Rit has been activated and is operational
button does not light up during self-diag-
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
nosis of the system.
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the
tomer Center
following buttons continues to light up red
Ra service subscription is available
after the system self-diagnosis:
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
- SOS button
i Determining the location of the vehicle on - F Roadside Assistance call button
a map is only possible if: - ï MB Info call button
RGPS reception is available. RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to erative or Service Not Activated
the Customer Assistance Center. message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The mbrace system If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expec-
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
follows:
have to be summoned by other means.
X Press the W or X button on the mul- Have the system checked at the nearest
tifunction steering wheel. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
or the following service hotlines:
X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
tem/COMAND. Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
 Features 263

Emergency call As soon as the emergency call has been ini-

tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
Important safety notes flashes. The multifunction display shows the
G WARNING Connecting Call message.
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, The audio output is muted.
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an Once the connection has been made, the
emergency if: Call Connected message appears in the
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- multifunction display.
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident All important information on the emergency is

Stowage and features

Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of transmitted, for example:
road Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be mined by the GPS system)
seen by other road users, particularly when Rvehicle identification number
dark or in poor visibility conditions Rinformation on the severity of the accident
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Shortly after the emergency call has been ini-
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- tiated, a voice connection is automatically
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. established between the Customer Assis-
Move to a safe location along with other vehi- tance Center and the vehicle occupants.
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
vehicle in accordance with national regula- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle. ter attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
You must have a license agreement to acti-
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
system is activated and operational. To reg- occupants, an ambulance is immediately
ister, press the ï MB Info call button. If sent to the vehicle.
any of the steps mentioned are not carried If no voice connection can be established to
out, the system may not be activated. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
If you have questions about the activation, Center, the system has been unable to initiate
contact one of the following telephone hot- an emergency call.
lines: This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes tinuously.
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
The Call Failed message appears in the
RCanada: Customer Service at
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
1-888-923-8367
In this case, summon assistance by other
General notes means.
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered.
i You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.

Z
264 Features

Making an emergency call The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance

button : flashes while the call is active.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐
necting Call message. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
Stowage and features

are available, the system transfers data to the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
X To initiate an emergency call manually:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
press cover : briefly to open.
Rvehicle identification number
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; i The audio system or COMAND display
flashes until the emergency call is conclu- indicates that a call is active. During the
ded. call, you can change to the navigation menu
X Wait for a voice connection to the by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- for example.
ter. Voice output is not available.
X After the emergency call, close cover :. A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-
ble, mbrace will not be able to make the Center and the vehicle occupants.
emergency call. If you leave the vehicle From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
immediately after pressing the SOS button, sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you will not know whether mbrace placed Center can ascertain the nature of the prob-
the emergency call. In this case, always lem (Y page 268).
summon assistance by other means. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or makes arrangements for
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-
tance call button : is flashing continu-
X Press Roadside Assistance button :. ously.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Customer Assistance Center. Benz Customer Assistance Center was

established.
 Features 265

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
network is not available, for example. for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the Voice output is not available.
multifunction display. A voice connection is established between
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
multifunction steering wheel. Center and the vehicle occupants.
or You receive information about operating your
X Press the corresponding button for ending vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-

Stowage and features

a phone call on the audio system or on
COMAND. ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
MB Info call button the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiate
an MB Info call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-
ton : is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
X Press MB Info call button :. The Call Failed message appears in the
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz multifunction display.
Customer Assistance Center. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : multifunction steering wheel.
flashes while the connection is being made. or
The multifunction display shows the Con‐ X Press the corresponding button for ending
necting Call message. The audio system a phone call on the audio system or on
is muted. COMAND.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction Call priority
display.
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
are available, the system transfers data to the call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, gency call will take priority and override all
for example: other active calls.
Rcurrent location of the vehicle The indicator lamp of the respective button
Rvehicle identification number flashes until the call is ended.
i The audio system or COMAND display An emergency call can only be terminated by
indicates that a call is active. During the the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
call, you can change to the navigation menu Center.

Z
266 Features

All other calls can be ended by pressing: Route Assistance

Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-
ing wheel age and cannot be purchased separately.
Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys- i You can also use the Route Assistance
tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone function if your vehicle is not equipped with
call a navigation system.
i When a call is initiated, the audio system Within the framework of this service, you
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer receive a professional and reliable form of
Stowage and features

connected to COMAND. However, if you navigation support without having to leave

want to use your mobile phone, do so only your vehicle.
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe The customer service representative finds a
location. suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
Downloading destinations in COMAND You will then be guided live through the cur-
rent route section.
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access Search and Send
to a database with over 15 million points of
interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on General notes
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle
know the destination, the address can be must be equipped with mbrace and a navi-
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser-
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor- vice subscription must be completed.
tant destinations in the vicinity.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-
Furthermore, you can download routes with vice. A destination address which is found on
up to 20 way points.
Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace
You are prompted to confirm route guidance directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
to the address entered.
X Select Yes with the = or ; buttons
Specifying and sending the destination
on the COMAND system. address
X Go to the website http://
X Confirm with the 9 button on the
COMAND system. www.maps.google.com and enter a desti-
nation address into the entry field.
The system calculates the route and subse-
X To send the destination address to the
quently starts the route guidance with the
e-mail address of your mbrace account:
address entered.
click on the corresponding button on the
i If you select No
No, the address can be saved website.
in the address book. i Example:
i The destination download function is If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
available if the relevant mobile phone net- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
work is available and data transfer is pos- will be sent to your vehicle.
sible. X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
i The destination download function can
only be used if the vehicle is equipped with
a navigation system.
 Features 267

Enter the e-mail address you specified ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
when setting up your mbrace account into 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
the corresponding field. remotely.
X Click "Send". X Contact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
i Information on specific commands such
as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
on the website. (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
Calling up destination addresses 1-888-923-8367

Stowage and features

X Switch on the ignition. You will be asked for your password.
The destination address is loaded into the X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
vehicle's navigation system. upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
A display message appears, asking Assistance Center.
whether navigation should be started. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY opened via:
the COMAND controller and press W to
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
confirm.
The system calculates the route and sub- section
sequently starts the route guidance with Rthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®,

the address entered. Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identification
i If you select No
No, the address can be saved number and password.
in the address book.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
i If you have sent more than one destina- the corresponding mobile phone network is
tion address, each individual destination accessible.
must be confirmed separately.
i Destination addresses are loaded in the Vehicle remote closing
same order as the order in which they were
The vehicle remote locking feature can be
sent.
used when you have forgotten to lock the
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi- vehicle and you are no longer nearby.
cles with mbrace and activated mbrace
The vehicle can then be locked by the
accounts:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
same e-mail address, the destination will
locked within four days of the ignition being
be sent to all the vehicles.
turned off. After this time, remote locking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
Vehicle remote opening 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you remotely.
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and X Contact the following service hotlines:
a replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-
Z
268 Features

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis

tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
With the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
sis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer
RCanada: Customer Service at
Assistance center can provide improved sup-
1-888-923-8367 port for problems with your vehicle. During an
You will be asked for your password. existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
The next time you are inside the vehicle and Customer Assistance center. The customer
you switch on the ignition, the Doors service representative can use the received
Locked Remotely message appears in the data to decide what kind of assistance is
Stowage and features

multifunction display. required. You are then, for example, guided to

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
locked via: ter or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
section
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Rthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®,
center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐
Blackberry) tance Connected message in the COMAND
To do this, you will need your identification display. If the vehicle remote malfunction
number and password. diagnosis can be started, the Request for
vehicle diagnosis received. Start
i The vehicle remote closing feature is
available when the relevant mobile phone vehicle diagnosis? message appears in
network is available and data connection is the display.
possible. X Confirm the message with Yes Yes.
X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
Stolen vehicle recovery service start ignition message appears, turn
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
If your vehicle has been stolen:
lock (Y page 139).
X Notify the police. X When the Please follow the instruc‐
The police will issue a numbered incident tions received by phone and move
report. your vehicle to a safe position.
X This number will be forwarded to the message appears, follow the customer ser-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- vice representative's instructions.
ter together with your PIN. The message in the display disappears.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance If you select Cancel
Cancel, the vehicle remote
Center then tries to locate the system. The malfunction diagnosis is canceled com-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- pletely.
ter contacts you and the local law enforce-
The vehicle operating state check begins.
ment agency if the vehicle is located.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis
However, only the law enforcement agency activated. message.
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Send
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- connection may be//interrupted dur‐
Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto- ing data transfer) message appears. The
matically notified. vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer
Assistance center.
 Features 269

X Press OK to confirm the message. gation system, you will see the <route
The voice connection with the Customer name> has been saved to memory card.
Assistance center is terminated. Do you want to start route guidance?
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: message in the COMAND display. The route is
Transferring data... message. saved to the SD memory card.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer X To start route guidance: select YesYes.
Assistance center. An overview of the route is shown in the
Depending on what the customer service rep- display.
resentative agreed with you, the voice con- i If you select No
No, the saved route can be

Stowage and features

nection is re-established after the transfer is called up later via the navigation menu.
complete. If necessary, you will be contacted X Select Start
Start.
at a later time by another means, e.g. by e- Route guidance is started.
mail or phone.
Further functions of the vehicle remote mal- i Downloaded and saved data can be called
function diagnosis include, for example: up again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the sep-
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
arate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
the COMAND display shows a message
about various special offers at your work-
Speed alert
shop. You can define the upper speed limit, which
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-
etc. If applicable, you will receive informa- cle, a message will be sent to the Customer
tion on special offers in the e-mail. Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance
USA only: this information can also be Center then forwards this information to you.
called up under "Owners Online" at http:// You can select the way in which you receive
www.mbusa.com. this information beforehand. Possible options
Information on the data stored in the vehicle include text message, e-mail or an automated
(Y page 27). call.
Information on Roadside Assistance The data you receive contains the following
(Y page 23). information:
Rthe location where the speed limit was
Downloading routes exceeded
Downloading routes allows you to transfer Rthe time at which the speed limit was
and save predefined routes in the navigation exceeded
system. To do this, an SD memory card must Rthe selected speed limit which was excee-
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no ded
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
the card into the card slot on the COMAND Geo fencing
system before saving.
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
customer service representative or via the
be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-
mbrace portal on the Internet.
daries of the selected areas. You can select
Each route can include up to 20 way points. the way in which you receive this information
Once a route has been received by the navi-
Z
270 Features

beforehand. Possible options include text Certain garage door drives are incompatible
message, e-mail or an automated call. with the integrated garage door opener. If you
The area can be determined as either a circle have difficulty programing the integrated
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. garage door opener, contact an authorized
You can specify up to ten areas simultane- Mercedes-Benz Center.
ously. Different settings are possible for each Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
area. phone assistance services:
USA only: these settings can be called up RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
under "Owners Online" at http:// Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Stowage and features

www.mbusa.com. RCanada: Customer Service at

Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call 1-800-387-0100
and inform the customer service representa- RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
of charge)
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message. More information on HomeLink® and/or
compatible products is also available online
Triggering the vehicle alarm at http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
With this function, you can trigger the vehi- (Y page 25).
cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
alarm switches off. Important safety notes
G WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
Garage door opener
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
General notes sons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
The HomeLink® garage door opener integra- garage door. There is a risk of injury.
ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
When using the integrated garage door
ate up to three different door and gate sys-
opener, always make sure that nobody is
tems.
within the range of movement of the garage
Use the integrated garage door opener only door.
on garage doors that:
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and G WARNING
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
Once programed, the integrated garage door gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
function of the garage door system's remote is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
control. Please also read the operating the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
instructions for the garage door system. out sufficient ventilation.
When programing a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
engine while programing.
 Features 271

Programming When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-

graming was successful. The next step is to
Programing buttons synchronize the rolling code.
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" X Release button B on remote control A for
(Y page 270). the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the correspond-
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
doing so, vary the distance between remote

Stowage and features

control A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another
Garage door remote control A is not inclu- position.
ded with the integrated garage door opener.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Synchronizing the rolling code
tion lock (Y page 139). Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
(Y page 270).
control the garage door drive. If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
X To start programing mode: press and
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte-
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you
grated garage door opener.
will need to use the programing button on the
The garage door opener is now in program-
door drive control panel. The programing but-
ing mode. After a short time, indicator
ton may be positioned at different locations
lamp : lights up yellow.
depending on the manufacturer. It is usually
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon located on the door drive unit on the garage
as button ;, = or ? is programed for the ceiling.
first time. If the selected button has already
Familiarize yourself with the garage door
been programed, indicator lamp : will
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-
only light up yellow after ten seconds have
graming of additional remote controls",
elapsed.
before carrying out the following steps.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
lamp : flashes yellow.
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
X To program the remote control: point
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
garage door remote control A towards objects are present within the sweep of the
buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at door or gate.
a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Press and hold button B on remote control
tion lock (Y page 139).
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
X Get out of the vehicle.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programing is finished. X Press the programing button on the door
drive unit.

Z
272 Features

Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
tiate the next step. graming was successful. The next step is to
X Get into the vehicle. synchronize the rolling code.
X Press previously programed button ;, = X Release button B of remote control A of
or ? on the integrated garage door opener the garage door drive.
until the door closes. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
The rolling code synchronization is then programing process for the corresponding
complete. button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote con-
Stowage and features

Notes on programing the remote control trol A and the rear-view mirror.
Canadian radio frequency laws require a The required distance between remote
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission control A and the integrated garage door
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. opener depends on the garage door drive
Therefore, these signals may not last long system. Several attempts might be neces-
enough for the integrated garage door sary. You should test every position for at
opener. The signal is not recognized during least 25 seconds before trying another
programing. Comparable with Canadian law, position.
some U.S. garage door openers also feature a
"break". Problems when programing
Proceed as follows: If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the
Rif you live in Canada
rear-view mirror, take note of the following
Rif you have difficulties programing the instructions:
garage door opener (regardless of where
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
you live) when using the programing steps.
garage door drive remote control A and
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
whether it is supported. The transmitter
the integrated garage door opener. frequency can usually be found on the back
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights of the garage door drive remote control.
up yellow.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
X Release the button.
patible with devices that have units which
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. operate in the frequency range of 280 to
X Press button B of garage door remote 433 MHz.
control A for two seconds, then release it RReplace the batteries in garage door
for two seconds. remote control A. This increases the like-
X Press button B again for two seconds. lihood that garage door remote control A
X Repeat this sequence on button B of will transmit a strong and precise signal to
remote control A until indicator lamp : the integrated garage door opener.
lights up green. RWhen programing, hold remote control A
When indicator lamp : lights up green: at varying distances and angles from the
programing is finished. button which you are programing. Try vari-
ous angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control is available for the
same garage door drive, repeat the same
programing steps with this remote control.
 Features 273

Before performing these steps, make sure Compass

that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A. Calling up the compass
RNote that some remote controls only trans-
mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
cator lamp on the remote control goes out).
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

Stowage and features

opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programed, the integrated Compass ; displays the compass direction
garage door opener performs the function of in which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
the garage door system remote control. NE, E, SE
NE SE, S, SW
SW, W or NW
NW.
Please also read the operating instructions
To receive a correct display in rear-view mir-
for the garage door system.
ror :, the compass must be calibrated and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
the magnetic field zone set.
tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press but-
ton ;, = or ? again if necessary.

Clearing the memory

Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 139).
X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Z
274 Features

Setting the compass X Push a round pen into opening

=(Y page 273) for approximately three
seconds.
The zone currently selected appears in
compass display ;(Y page 273).
X To select the zone: push a round pen into
opening =(Y page 273) until the desired
zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in com-
Stowage and features

pass display ;(Y page 273) changes

direction, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
North America zone map In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or high-
voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Push a round pen into opening
=(Y page 273) for approximately six sec-
onds, until symbol C is shown in compass
display ;(Y page 273).
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
South America zone map (10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
X Set your location using the zone maps.
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ;(Y page 273).

Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
 Features 275

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are

stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.

Stowage and features

X Slide the seat backwards.
X To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.

Z
276
 277

Useful information ............................ 278

Engine compartment ........................ 278
ASSYST PLUS .................................... 282
Care .................................................... 283

Maintenance and care

278 Engine compartment

Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
publication of the Operator's manual. is a risk of injury.
Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine
Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment:
equipped with all features described. This
Rswitch off the ignition
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
Maintenance and care

i Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area
ist workshops (Y page 26).
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-

Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts

Hood Opening the hood

Important safety notes
G WARNING
G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
There is a risk of an accident. Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
G WARNING touch only the components described in the
following.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of G WARNING
movement of the hood. When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
Open and close the hood only when no one is
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
within its range of movement.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood.
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
not folded away from the windshield. You
compartment could expose you to hot gases
could otherwise damage the windshield
or other service products. There is a risk of
wipers or the hood.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
 Engine compartment 279

Engine oil
Notes on the oil level
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
AMG vehicles: before operation on race
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are tracks, check the oil level and (Y page 279)

Maintenance and care

turned off. add oil if necessary (Y page 280). Race track
operation is only permitted with a maximum
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
engine oil level.
The hood is released.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-
dle ; up and lift the hood. Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in stick
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut. G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Closing the hood
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height Working in the engine compartment poses a
of approximately 8 in (20 cm). risk of injury.
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not touch only the components described in the
properly engaged. Open it again and close following.
it with a little more force.

Z
280 Engine compartment

H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a ser-
vice system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Example
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
Maintenance and care

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide

center.
tube.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
caused by the following:
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and not been specifically approved for the
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. service system
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine the interval for replacement specified by
oil. the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.

Adding engine oil ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is
above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too
G WARNING much oil has been added. This can lead to
Certain components in the engine compart- damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.

G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to Example: engine oil cap
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- it.
ponents before starting the engine. X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
 Engine compartment 281

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
clockwise. Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
Ensure that the cap locks into place cle is on a level surface and the engine has
securely. cooled down.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
stick (Y page 279). tion lock (Y page 139).
Further information on engine oil On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
(Y page 349). Start/Stop button twice (Y page 140).
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in
the multifunction display.
Checking and adding other service The coolant temperature must be below

Maintenance and care

products 158 ‡ (70 †).
Checking coolant level X Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.
G WARNING X Slowly turn cap ; half a turn counter-
Certain components in the engine compart- clockwise to allow excess pressure to
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts escape.
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. X Turn cap ; further counter-clockwise and
Working in the engine compartment poses a remove it.
risk of injury. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
Where possible, let the engine cool down and in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
touch only the components described in the coolant in coolant expansion tank :.
following. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel
G WARNING filler neck when warm, there is enough
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- coolant in expansion tank :.
ticularly when the engine is warm. When X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
X Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far
Let the engine cool down before opening the as it will go.
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a For further information on coolant, see
turn to allow pressure to escape. (Y page 351).

Windshield washer system

G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Example

Z
282 ASSYST PLUS

G WARNING engine oil level. Observe the notes on the

Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if engine oil level (Y page 279).
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- The multifunction display shows a service
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of message for several seconds, e.g.:
fire and injury. RService A in .. Days
Make sure that no windshield washer con- RService A Due
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
Maintenance and care

The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a

number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Example does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is disconnec-
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. ted.
X Add the premixed washer fluid. Maintaining the time-dependent service
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck schedule:
until it engages.
X Note down the service due date displayed
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec- in the multifunction display before discon-
ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message necting the battery.
appears in the multifunction display prompt- or
ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 242).
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
Further information on windshield washer the battery disconnection periods from the
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 352). service date shown on the display.

ASSYST PLUS
Hiding a service message
Service messages X Press the a or % button on the steer-
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display ing wheel.
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
 Care 283

Displaying service messages Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfaces
X Switch on the ignition.
Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ods
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by replaced or changed more frequently. Under
pressing the a button. arduous operating conditions, the tires must
The service due date appears in the multi- be checked more often. Further information
function display. can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.

Maintenance and care

Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service Driving abroad
interval display An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set- obtain further information from any author-
ting can be corrected at a qualified special- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described Care
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-
erwise lead to increased wear and damage Notes on care
to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
H Environmental note
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
ner.
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
maintenance work, for example. of the following:
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
Special service requirements
Rabrasive cleaning agents
The specified maintenance interval takes only Rsolvents
the normal operation of the vehicle into
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- Do not scrub.
nance work must be carried out more fre- Do not touch the surfaces or protective
quently, for example: films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
ate stops damage the surfaces and protective film.
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
short distances period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
Z
284 Care

should drive for a few minutes after clean- ! Make sure that the automatic transmis-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the sion is in position N when washing your
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi-
vehicle can then be parked. cle could be damaged if the transmission is
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for in another position.
retaining the quality in the long term. ! Make sure that:
Use care products and cleaning agents rec- Rthe side windows and the roof are com-
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. pletely closed
Rthe climate control blower is switched off

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
0
Maintenance and care

paintwork
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
Automatic car wash
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
G WARNING wash from the very start.
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
carefully while paying attention to the traffic wax from the windshield and the wiper
conditions until full braking power is restored. blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function shield.
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- Washing by hand
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- In some countries, washing by hand is only
ing or other similar situations: allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in all coun-
Rwhen towing the vehicle tries concerned.
Rin the car wash X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
! It is preferable to use car washes with vehicle in direct sunlight.
adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that X Use a soft sponge to clean.
corresponds to the specification for the X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
Cabriolet program. In car washes that use shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
high water pressures, there is a risk that a
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
small amount of water may leak into the
gentle jet of water.
vehicle.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
! Lock the car if you wash it in an automatic the air inlet.
car wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might be X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
damaged. sponge frequently.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
Automatic Car Wash as these use special thoroughly with a chamois.
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. paintwork.
 Care 285

When using the vehicle in winter, remove all Cleaning the paintwork
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible. ! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Power washers Rfilms
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
G WARNING
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
damage the paintwork.
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
edly. There is a risk of an accident. quate care cannot always be completely

Maintenance and care

Do not use power washers with circular jet repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged cialist workshop.
tires or chassis components replaced imme- X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
diately. while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
! Always maintain a distance of at least and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
power washer nozzle. Information about
off the treated areas afterwards.
the correct distance is available from the
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
equipment manufacturer.
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
Move the power washer nozzle around
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
when cleaning your vehicle.
lighter fluid.
Do not aim directly at any of the following: X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Rtires X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
Relectrical components
surface, use the paint care products recom-
Rbattery mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Rconnectors This is the case approximately every three to
Rlights five months, depending on the climate con-
Rseals
ditions and the care product used.
Rtrim
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
Rventilation slots
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Damaged seals or electrical components Benz should be used.
can lead to leaks or failures. Do not use these care products in the sun or
! Do not use high-pressure cleaners if the on the hood while the hood is hot.
tank recess is open while you clean it. This X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
can cause damage to the seals or other Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
components. the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Z
286 Care

Matte finish care ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended

period straight after cleaning it, particularly
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
shine.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
! The following may cause the paint to brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
become shiny and thus reduce the matte should drive for a few minutes after clean-
effect: ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate- brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
rials. vehicle can then be parked.
RFrequent use of car washes.
Cleaning the windows
Maintenance and care

RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- G WARNING

ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. You could become trapped by the windshield
wax. These products are only suitable for wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
with matte finish leads to considerable sur- injury.
face damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always switch off the windshield wipers and
Always have paintwork repairs carried out the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
at a qualified specialist workshop. wiper blades.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
treatment under any circumstances. solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid not touch the insides of the windows with
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
treatment. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
i The vehicle should preferably be washed
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
and pollen may under certain circumstan-
and plenty of water.
ces prevent water from draining away. This
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo can lead to corrosion damage and damage
from the range of recommended and to electronic components.
approved Mercedes-Benz care products. X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agent that is recommended and approved
Cleaning the vehicle parts
by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the wheels
Cleaning wiper blades
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage G WARNING
wheel bolts and brake components. You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
 Care 287

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning

injury. cloths.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or Cleaning the sensors
wiper blades.
! If you clean the sensors with a power
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
the wiper blade could be damaged. tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and Information about the correct distance is
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the available from the equipment manufac-
graphite coating could be damaged. This turer.

Maintenance and care

could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
the plastic light lenses. with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior

Cleaning the exhaust pipe
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car G WARNING
shampoo or cleaning cloths. The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
Mirror turn signals with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Always be particularly careful around the
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic these components to cool down before touch-
lenses of the mirror turn signals. ing them.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
signals in the exterior mirror housing using based cleaning agents such as sanitary
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. cleansers or wheel cleaners.

Z
288 Care

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
product tested and approved by Mercedes- ces:
Benz. Rstickers
Impurities combined with the effects of road Rfilms
grit and corrosive environmental factors may Rscented oil bottles or similar items
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust You can otherwise damage the plastic.
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win- ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
ter and after washing. or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
Interior care
Maintenance and care

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free

Cleaning the display cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
products recommended and approved by
lowing:
Mercedes-Benz.
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline The surface may change color temporarily.
Rabrasive cleaning agents Wait until the surface is dry again.
Rcommercially-available household clean-
ing agents Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
These may damage the display surface. Do selector lever
not put pressure on the display surface X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- leather care agents that have been recom-
ble damage to the display. mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down. Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
X Clean the display surface using a commer- ments
cially available microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display cleaner. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
fiber cloth.
damaging the surface.

Cleaning the plastic trim ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
G WARNING mostly made of anodized aluminum and
Care products and cleaning agents containing can lose their shine if chrome polish is
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may when cleaning the trim pieces.
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
ment. There is a risk of injury. dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
Do not use any care products and cleaning are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
agents to clean the cockpit. are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
 Care 289

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with Seat covers of other materials
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber ! Observe the following when cleaning:
cloth.
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
moistened with a solution containing 1%
products recommended and approved by detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Mercedes-Benz.
RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution contain-
Cleaning the seat covers ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq-
uid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire
General notes
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen- lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.

Maintenance and care

uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA Cleaning results depend on the type of
covers. If used often, these can damage the dirt and how long it has been there.
cover. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
i Note that regular care is essential to cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
ensure that the appearance and comfort of seat sections to avoid leaving visible
the covers is retained over time. lines.
Genuine leather seat covers Cleaning the seat belts
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning G WARNING
instructions: Seat belts can become severely weakened if
RClean genuine leather covers carefully bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
ers down with a dry cloth. an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
become rough and cracked.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
ROnly use leather care agents that have
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
been tested and approved by Mercedes- by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
Benz. You can obtain these from a quali- (80 †) or in direct sunlight.
fied specialist workshop.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
Leather is a natural product. tion.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example: Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Rdifferences in the texture
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
Rslight nuances of color
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
These are characteristics of leather and not
ing agents recommended and approved by
material defects.
Mercedes-Benz.

Z
290
 291

Useful information ............................ 292

Where will I find...? ........................... 292
Flat tire .............................................. 292
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 297
Jump-starting .................................... 301
Towing and tow-starting .................. 303
Fuses .................................................. 306

Breakdown assistance
292 Flat tire

Useful information Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel

i This Operator's manual describes all

models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
i Read the information on qualified special-
: Folding wheel chock
ist workshops (Y page 26).
; Fuse allocation chart
Breakdown assistance

= Jack
Where will I find...? ? Sheet for faulty wheel
A Alignment bolt
Vehicle tool kit
B Lug wrench
General notes C Towing eye
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow- D Valve extractor
age well under the trunk floor. E Tire inflation compressor
i Apart from certain country-specific varia- X Lift the trunk floor up.
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a X Remove collapsible spare wheel
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- (Y page 341).
ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For
more information on which tools are
required to perform a wheel change on your Flat tire
vehicle, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop. Preparing the vehicle
Tools required for changing a wheel may Your vehicle may be equipped with:
include, for example: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-
RJack erties) (Y page 293)
RWheel chock Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
RLug wrench vehicles with MOExtended tires
RRatchet wrench Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 341)

RAlignment bolt Information on changing/mounting a wheel

(Y page 332).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 161).
 Flat tire 293

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the If the pressure loss warning message
straight-ahead position. appears in the multifunction display:
X Switch off the engine. RObserve the instructions in the display
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove messages (Y page 236).
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. RCheck the tire for damage.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
driver's door. The maximum driving distance is approx-
The on-board electronics now have status imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having partially laden and approximately 18 miles
been removed. (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock tance possible depends upon:
(Y page 140).
RSpeed

Breakdown assistance
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
RRoad condition
Make sure that they are not endangered as
ROutside temperature
they do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
area while a wheel is being changed. Any- may be reduced by extreme driving condi-
one who is not directly assisting in the tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
wheel change should, for example, stand through a moderate style of driving.
behind the barrier. The maximum permissible distance which
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
fic conditions when doing so. the moment the tire pressure loss warning
X Close the driver's door.
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
properties) that you use only tires:
General notes Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
Rmarked "MOExtended"
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand-
pressure in one or more tires. The affected ard tire may be used as a temporary meas-
tire must not show any clearly visible damage. ure. Make sure that you use the proper size
and type (summer or winter tire).
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
next to the tire size designation, the load- factory. It is therefore recommended that
bearing capacity and the speed index you additionally equip your vehicle with a
(Y page 326). TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
MOExtended tires may only be used in con- feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
junction with an active tire pressure loss A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, from
warning system or with an active tire pressure a qualified specialist workshop.
monitor.
294 Flat tire

Important safety notes G WARNING

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
from children. There is a risk of injury.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
observe the following:
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden immediately with water.
vehicle. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
Stop driving in emergency mode if: your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
Ryou hear banging noises.
Breakdown assistance

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately

Rthevehicle starts to shake.
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
RESP® is intervening constantly. and seek medical attention immediately.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. RImmediately change out of clothing which
After driving in emergency mode, have the has come into contact with tire sealant.
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
workshop with regard to their further use. The attention immediately.
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-
sor for longer than eight minutes at a time
TIREFIT kit without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
Important safety notes ated again once it has cooled down.
TIREFIT is a tire sealant. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire compressor.
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-
peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). Using the TIREFIT kit
G WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
TIREFIT sticker, 2-part
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
 Flat tire 295

X Do not remove any foreign objects which X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or tire.
nails. X Screw filler hose D onto valve.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
X Insert plug = into the socket of the ciga-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-
rette lighter (Y page 260) or into a 12 V
tion compressor from the stowage well
power socket in your vehicle (Y page 261)
underneath the trunk floor (Y page 292).
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
tion lock (Y page 139).
the driver's field of vision.
X Press on/off switch ? on the tire inflation
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
compressor to ON.
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated.
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.

Breakdown assistance
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should
then have attained a pressure of at least
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
bottom section of the tire inflation com- is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes,
pressor housing. see (Y page 296).
X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
the mounting on yellow cap A of tire seal- is not achieved after a maximum of ten
ant bottle : until the plug engages. minutes, see (Y page 295).
X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow
i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the
can then be removed like a layer of film.
mounting of tire inflation compressor ;.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
The cap must engage in both hooks.
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
has not been achieved after ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.

Z
296 Flat tire

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire X Pull away immediately.

pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ The maximum speed for a tire sealed with
29 psi). tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper
part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed
G WARNING
to the instrument cluster in the driver's
If the required tire pressure is not reached field of vision.
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
minutes and check the tire pressure with
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
the tire inflation compressor.
pressure that is too low can significantly
The tire pressure must now be at least
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified G WARNING
specialist workshop. If the required tire pressure is not reached
Breakdown assistance

after driving for a short period, the tire is too

Tire pressure reached badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
G WARNING tire pressure that is too low can significantly
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
impairs the driving characteristics and is not acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
accident. specialist workshop.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed i In cases such as the one mentioned
the specified maximum speed with a tire that above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
has been repaired using tire sealant. Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-
! Residue from the tire sealant may come ada).
out of the filler hose after use. This could X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
cause stains.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic see the Tire and Loading Information plac-
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. ard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire pres-
H Environmental note sure table on the fuel filler flap).
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist the tire inflation compressor.
workshop.

If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)

has been achieved after a maximum period of
ten minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
 Battery (vehicle) 297

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress have all work involving the battery carried out
pressure release button : next to pres- at a qualified specialist workshop.
sure gauge ;.
G WARNING
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
tire.
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
lead to function restrictions applying to
the sealed tire. safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You
could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
Rbraking

Breakdown assistance
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
tire inflation compressor, press together immediately. Do not drive any further. You
the locking tabs on the yellow cap. should have all work involving the battery car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor. For further information about ABS and ESP®,
The filler hose remains attached to the tire see (Y page 61) and (Y page 63).
sealant bottle.
G WARNING
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
inflation compressor.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
workshop and have the tire changed there. explosion.
X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
hose replaced as soon as possible at a body to remove any existing electrostatic
qualified specialist workshop. build-up.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist work- The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
shop. charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
Battery (vehicle) battery is electrostatically charged. A build-
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
Important safety notes
example:
Special tools and expert knowledge are Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
required when working on the battery, e.g. fibers
removal and installing. You should therefore Rdue to friction between clothing and seats

Z
298 Battery (vehicle)

Rif you push or pull the battery across the cialist workshop or a special
carpet or other synthetic materials collection point for used bat-
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth teries.
G WARNING
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
During the charging process, a battery produ- qualified specialist workshop.
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
Observe the service intervals in the Main-
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
cialist workshop for more information.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con- ! You should have all work involving the
tact with vehicle parts. battery carried out at a qualified specialist
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
tery. necessary for you to disconnect the battery
Breakdown assistance

yourself, make sure that:

RIt is important that you observe the descri-
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery. key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
ensure that the ignition is switched off.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
Check that all the indicator lamps in the
battery poles with identical polarity are
instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
connected.
electronic components, such as the
RIt is particularly important to observe the
alternator, may be damaged.
described order when connecting and dis- Ryou first remove the negative terminal
connecting the jumper cables.
clamp and then the positive terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
terminals while the engine is running. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-
tem may be damaged.
G WARNING Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. the transmission is locked in position P
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean cle is secured against rolling away. You
over the battery. Keep children away from can then no longer move the vehicle.
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with The battery and the cover of the positive
water and seek medical attention. terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
H Environmental note
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
Batteries contain dangerous
mum possible service life, it must always be
substances. It is against the
sufficiently charged.
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
must be collected separately tective measures when handling batteries.
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
 Battery (vehicle) 299

Risk of explosion. i If the power supply has been interrupted,

e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
have to:
Fire, open flames and smoking are Rset the clock; see the separate operating
prohibited when handling the bat- instructions.
tery. Avoid creating sparks. On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga-
tion system, the clock is set automati-
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- cally.
tact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
Wear suitable protective clothing, mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
especially gloves, apron and face- the mirrors out once (Y page 104).
guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physi- Charging the battery

Breakdown assistance
cian if necessary.
Wear eye protection. G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Keep children away. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Observe this Operator's Manual. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
discharge over time if you do not use the Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- over the battery. Keep children away from
nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
can also charge the battery with a charger water and seek medical attention.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop for further infor- G WARNING
mation.
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
Have the battery condition of charge checked tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- an explosion.
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
vehicle parked for a long period of time.
charging it or jump-starting.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
consumers. The vehicle will then use very mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
little energy, thus conserving battery ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
power. starting connection point.

Z
300 Battery (vehicle)

The jump-starting connection point is in the

engine compartment.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case, you
may neither charge the battery nor jump-start
the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out
battery may be shorter. The starting charac-
teristics can be impaired, particularly at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Read the battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
Breakdown assistance

X Open the hood.

X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor bat-
tery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 301).
 Jump-starting 301

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek
medical attention.

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.

Breakdown assistance
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither
charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
302 Jump-starting

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Breakdown assistance

Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.

Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral.
X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
 Towing and tow-starting 303

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.

Breakdown assistance
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
Important safety notes cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
! Vehicles with automatic transmission age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
must not be tow-started. You could other- PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
wise damage the automatic transmission. ing or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
G WARNING
Rin the car wash
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-
started is greater than the permissible gross ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
weight of your vehicle: towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
Rthe towing eye could detach itself be damaged.
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
over. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
There is a risk of an accident. recover the vehicle with a crane.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, ! Drive slowly and smoothly when towing.
its weight should not be greater than the per- Excessive tractive power could otherwise
missible gross weight of your vehicle. damage the vehicles.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop but-
ton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

Z
304 Towing and tow-starting

ignition lock and shift the automatic trans- Installing/removing the towing eye
mission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey back
to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. Installing the towing eye

! Make sure that the electric parking brake G WARNING

is released. If the electric parking brake is The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of care when removing the rear cover.
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
Breakdown assistance

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its

weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-
cle.
i Information on your vehicle's gross vehi-
cle weight rating can be found on the vehi-
cle identification plate (Y page 346).
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
when towing a vehicle, the automatic trans-
mission must be in position N. The mountings for the removable towing eyes
The battery must be connected and charged. are located in the bumpers. They are at the
Otherwise, you: front and at the rear, behind the covers.
Rcannot X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock direction of the arrow.
Rcannot shift the transmission to position N X Take cover : off the opening.

on vehicles with automatic transmission X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle

Vehicles with automatic transmission: tool kit (Y page 292).

release the selector lever lock manually to X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-
move it out of position P (Y page 158). wise to the stop.

i Disarm the automatic locking feature

Removing the towing eye
before the vehicle is towed (Y page 207).
You could otherwise be locked out when X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
pushing or towing the vehicle. X Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 292).
 Towing and tow-starting 305

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Vehicles with manual transmission:
raised depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to
neutral.
! The ignition must be switched off if you
or
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other-
wise damage the brake system. shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps X Release the brake pedal.
(Y page 111).
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position. It is important that you observe the safety
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- instructions when towing away your vehicle
tion lock and remove the SmartKey from (Y page 303).
the ignition lock.

Breakdown assistance
X When leaving the vehicle, take the Smart-
Transporting the vehicle
Key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
raised, it is important that you observe the
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
safety instructions (Y page 303).
the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
Towing a vehicle with both axles on onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
the ground purposes.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
G WARNING
depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the neutral.
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
is a risk of an accident.
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
tion lock.
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
X Move the selector lever to N.
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
(Y page 111).
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
i When towing with the hazard warning applying the electric parking brake.
lamps switched on, use the combination
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
switch as usual to signal a change of direc-
tion. In this case, only the indicator lamps fully depress the clutch pedal and engage
for the direction of travel flash. When you first or reverse gear.
reset the combination switch, the hazard X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
warning flashers start flashing again. move the selector lever to P.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock. tion lock and remove the SmartKey from
the ignition lock.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
X Secure the vehicle.
brake pedal and keep it depressed.

Z
306 Fuses

Tow-starting (emergency engine Fuses

starting)
Important safety notes
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started. You could other- G WARNING
wise damage the automatic transmission. If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
i You can find information on "Jump-start-
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
ing" under (Y page 301).
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
Before tow-starting: accident and injury.
Rthe battery must be connected Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
Rthe engine must be cold new fuses having the correct amperage.
Rthe exhaust system must have cooled down
! Only use fuses that have been approved
When tow-starting, it is important that you for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
Breakdown assistance

observe the safety instructions (Y page 303). have the correct fuse rating for the system
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
(Y page 111). tems could be damaged.
X Install the towing eye (Y page 304).
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
rope. nents on the circuit and their functions stop
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. operating.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
tion lock. the same rating, which you can recognize by
X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec- the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
ond gear and keep the clutch pedal in the fuse allocation chart.
depressed. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
X Release the brake pedal. cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
X Tow-start the vehicle.
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not
depress the accelerator pedal while doing
so. Before changing a fuse
X As soon as the engine starts, depress the
clutch pedal immediately and shift to neu- X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
tral. (Y page 161).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Stop at a suitable place, in accordance with
the traffic conditions. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-

X Depress the parking brake. tion lock and remove it (Y page 139).
X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. or
X Remove the towing eye (Y page 304). X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
the ignition is switched off (Y page 140).
X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
 Fuses 307

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: X To close: check whether the seal is seated
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the correctly in cover ;.
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed X Insert cover ; at the rear of the fuse box
in the direction of travel into the retainer.
RFuse box in the trunk X Fold down cover ; and close clamps :.

The fuse allocation chart is located in the X Close the hood.

vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
under the trunk floor (Y page 292).
Fuse box in the trunk
Fuse box in the engine compartment i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 306).
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 306). ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

Breakdown assistance
fuse box when the cover is open.
G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the
the operation of the fuses. partition covering.
X Open the trunk lid.
X To open: release cover : on the right and
left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are

turned off.
X Open the hood.
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X To open: open clamp :.
X Remove fuse box cover ; forwards.

Z
308
 309

Useful information ............................ 310

Important safety notes .................... 310
Operation ........................................... 310
Winter operation ............................... 312
Tire pressure ..................................... 314
Loading the vehicle .......................... 322
All about wheels and tires ............... 324
Changing a wheel ............................. 332
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 337
Emergency spare wheel ................... 341

Wheels and tires

310 Operation

Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Operator's manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics).
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's manual. Accessories that are not approved for your
Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
Please note that your vehicle may not be used correctly can impair operating safety.
equipped with all features described. This Before purchasing and using non-approved
also applies to safety-related systems and accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
functions. shop and inquire about:
i Read the information on qualified special- Rsuitability
ist workshops (Y page 26). Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Important safety notes Information on dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
(Y page 337).
G WARNING
Information on air pressure for the tires on
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires

your vehicle can be found:

the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
dent. tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 322)
Always replace wheels and tires with those Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
that fulfill the specifications of the original flap (Y page 159)
part. Rin the "Tire pressure" section
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Operation
Rmodel Information on driving
When replacing tires, make sure to use the If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
correct: pressures and correct them if necessary.
Rdesignation While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
Rmanufacturer noises and unusual handling characteristics,
Rmodel e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
G WARNING pect that a tire is defective, reduce your
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
There is a risk of accident.
causing the unusual handling characteristics.
Tires without run-flat characteristics: If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your workshop.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or When parking your vehicle, make sure that
consult a qualified specialist workshop. the tires do not get deformed by the curb or
 Operation 311

other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over The service life of tires depends on the fol-
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try lowing factors amongst other things:
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- RDrivingstyle
erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
RTirepressure
may be damaged.
RDistance covered

Regular checking of wheels and tires

Important safety notes on the tire
G WARNING tread
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of G WARNING
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as ditions. There is a risk of accident.
well as after driving off-road or on rough If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-

Wheels and tires

tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
age such as: should regularly check the tread depth and
Rcuts
the condition of the tread across the entire
in the tires
width of all tires.
Rpunctures
Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rtears in the tires
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rbulges on tires
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
condition of the tread across the whole width
tire tread depth is reached.
of the tire (Y page 311). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 314). Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
Observe the notes on the emergency spare into the tire tread.
wheel (Y page 341). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once the tread depth is

Z
312 Winter operation

approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-
case, the tire is so worn that it must be fied specialist workshop.
replaced.

Winter operation
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires General notes
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-
type and make. fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-
ter.
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires section (Y page 332).
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 293).
Driving with summer tires
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
their full performance after this distance. cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
Wheels and tires

RDo not drive with tires which have too little

cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
responsibility for this type of damage.
RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear. G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
properties) Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat and replace any damaged tires immediately.
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
G WARNING
junction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
Mercedes-Benz. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
a flat tire (Y page 293). M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use win-
factory. It is therefore recommended that ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
you additionally equip your vehicle with a are identified by the M+S marking.
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
 Winter operation 313

vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you
ditions. mount snow chains on steel wheels, you
Only these tires will allow driving safety sys- may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub
tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti- caps from the relevant wheels before
mally in winter. These tires have been devel- mounting the snow chains.
oped specifically for driving in snow. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on mends that you only use snow chains that
all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- have been specially approved for your vehicle
teristics. by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
Always observe the maximum permissible standard of quality.
speed specified for the M+S tires you have If you intend to mount snow chains, please
mounted. bear the following points in mind:
When you have mounted M+S tires: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 317). wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 337).
X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure
ROnly use snow chains when driving on
monitor (Y page 318).
roads completely covered by snow.
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-
sure loss warning system (Y page 318).
ble when you come to a road that is not

Wheels and tires

For more information on driving with the snow-covered.
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 341). RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-
ulations if you wish to install snow chains.
Snow chains RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

G WARNING speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

If snow chains are installed to the front i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle pulling away with snow chains installed
body or chassis components. This could (Y page 64). You can thereby allow the
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
There is a risk of an accident. ieving an increased driving force (cutting
To avoid hazardous situations: action).
Rnever install snow chains to the front For more information on driving with the
wheels emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 341).
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level

(height 1) if snow chains have been instal-
led. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-
aged.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".
Z
314 Tire pressure

Tire pressure Further information on tire pressures can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes Tire and Loading Information placard

G WARNING
Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
too high are associated with the following
hazards:
Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at high
speeds.
Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tire
traction.
: Recommended tire pressures
Rthe driving, steering and braking character-
istics may be severely impaired. The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
There is a risk of accident.
(Y page 322).
Wheels and tires

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
tains the recommended tire pressures for
ing the spare wheel:
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
Rmonthly, at least are valid for the maximum permissible load
Rif the load changes and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
Rbefore beginning a long journey speed.
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving Tire pressure table
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pres-
sure tables are examples. Tire pressure
specifications are vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data shown here. The tire
pressure specifications that are valid for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire pres-
sure table on the vehicle.

General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here. The tire pressure table contains the recom-
Operation with the emergency spare mended pressures for cold tires for various
wheel(Y page 341). operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
 Tire pressure 315

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this

can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire
pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking.
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
seats may differ.
tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheels and tires

G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
(Y page 326). does not permit any reliable conclusion about
If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring sys-
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to tem, the tire pressure can be checked using
the higher values: the on-board computer.
Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase
and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. ent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
i The tire pressures for increased loads sures when the tires are cold.
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.

Z
316 Tire pressure

The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may:

Rif the vehicle has been parked without Roverheat, leading to tire defects
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-
hours and teristics
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than Rwear quickly and unevenly
1 mile (1.6 km). Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed Overinflation
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure G WARNING
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
1.5 psi). Take this into account when check- because they are damaged more easily by
ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current also suffer from irregular wear, which can
operating conditions. If you check the tire severely impair the braking properties and the
pressure when the tires are warm, the result- driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
ing value will be higher than if the tires were accident.
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
pressure to the value specified for cold tires. tires, including the spare wheel.
Wheels and tires

The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures for Overinflated tires may:
cold tires: Rincrease the braking distance
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac-
on the B-pillar on the driver's side teristics
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the Rwear quickly and unevenly
fuel filler flap Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the emer- Rbe more susceptible to damage
gency/collapsible spare wheel (depending
on vehicle equipment) Maximum tire pressures

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident. : Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the sure
tires, including the spare wheel. Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
 Tire pressure 317

when adjusting the tire pressure Tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 314). (Canada only)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- General notes
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration. While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-
sure loss warning system monitors the set
tire pressure using the rotational speed of the
Checking the tire pressures wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
Important safety notes of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a
Observe the notes on tire pressure loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
(Y page 314). message will appear in the multifunction dis-
play.
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found: You can recognize the tire pressure loss warn-
ing by the Run Flat Indicator Active
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- Press 'OK' to Restart message which
tion placard on the B-pillar appears in the Service menu of the multi-
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler function display. Information on the message
flap display can be found in the "Restarting the tire

Wheels and tires

Rin the "Tire pressure" section pressure loss warning system" section
(Y page 318).
Checking tire pressures manually
Important safety notes
To determine and set the correct tire pres-
sure, proceed as follows: The tire pressure warning system does not
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
be checked. Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 314).
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve. The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
the recommended value on the Tire and tires at the same time cannot be detected by
Loading Information placard (Y page 314). the tire pressure loss warning system.
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
the recommended value. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
pressing down the metal pin in the valve. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
check the tire pressure again using the tire abrupt steering maneuvers.
pressure gauge. The function of the tire pressure loss warning
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. system is limited or delayed if:
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Z
318 Tire pressure

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- If you wish to confirm the restart:
nering at high speeds or driving with high X Press the a button.
rates of acceleration). The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
Ryou drive with a heavy load. appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- Yes.
Yes
ing system
X Press the a button.
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
if you have: message appears in the multifunction dis-
Rchanged the tire pressure play.
Rchanged the wheels or tires After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set
Rmounted new wheels or tires
tire pressures of all four tires.
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
If you wish to cancel the restart:
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions. X Press the % button.
The recommended tire pressures can be or
found on the Tire and Loading Information X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side appears, use the 9 or : button to
Wheels and tires

or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler select Cancel

Cancel.
flap.
X Press the a button.
The tire pressure loss warning system can The tire pressure values stored at the last
only give reliable warnings if you have set restart will continue to be monitored.
the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire
pressure is set, these incorrect values will
be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 314). General notes
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops
X Press the 9 or : button to select in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure
Tire Pressure.
Pressure monitor only functions if the correct sensors
X Press the a button. are installed on all wheels.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Information on tire pressures is displayed in
Press 'OK' to Restart message the multifunction display. After a few minutes
appears in the multifunction display. of driving, the current tire pressure of each
tire is shown in the Service menu of the mul-
tifunction display.
 Tire pressure 319

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
Example: current tire pressure display remain continuously illuminated. This
For information on the message display, refer sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cle is started as long as the malfunction
cally" section (Y page 320). exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
Important safety notes the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
G WARNING tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), including the installation of incompatible
should be checked at least once a month replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
the Tire and Loading Information placard on

Wheels and tires

function telltale after replacing one or more
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
vehicle has tires of a different size than the allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- erly.
mation placard or the tire pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire pressure for It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
those tires. pressure to that recommended for cold tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has which is suitable for the operating situation
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (Y page 314). Note that the correct tire pres-
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure for the current operating situation must
sure telltale when one or more of your tires first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, warning threshold for the warning message is
you should stop and check your tires as soon aligned to the reference values taught-in.
as possible, and inflate them to the proper Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- ing the pressure of the cold tires
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can (Y page 321). The current pressures are
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also saved as new reference values. As a result, a
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and warning message will appear if the tire pres-
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- sure drops significantly.
ping ability. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- the notes on the recommended tire pressure
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire (Y page 314).
pressure, even if underinflation has not The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
reached the level to trigger illumination of the you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the

Z
320 Tire pressure

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Checking the tire pressure electroni-
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid cally
abrupt steering maneuvers.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether
the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- ing wheel to select the Service menu.
cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the X Press the 9 or : button to select

tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Tire Pressure.

Pressure
X Press the a button.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- The current tire pressure of each tire is
icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is shown in the multifunction display.
not malfunctioning. If the vehicle has been parked for over
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
minute and then remains lit constantly, the displayed after driving a few
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. minutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- monitor automatically detects new wheels or
sage appears in the multifunction display.
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
Wheels and tires

Further information can be found on the tire pressure value to the individual
(Y page 236). wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, Monitor Active display message is shown
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the pressures are already being monitored.
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
minute and then remaining lit. When the mal- the system may continue to show the tire
function has been rectified, the tire pressure pressure of the wheel that has been
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,
driving. note that the value displayed for the posi-
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- tion where the spare wheel is mounted is
board computer may differ from those meas- not the same as the current tire pressure of
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. the emergency spare wheel.
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
computer refer to those measured at sea Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- sages
ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher
than those shown by the on-board computer. If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. loss in one or more tires, a warning message
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can is shown in the multifunction display and the
be affected by interference from radio trans- yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, comes on.
two-way radios) that may be being operated RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
in or near the vehicle. message appears in the multifunction dis-
play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
 Tire pressure 321

too low and must be corrected at the next X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
opportunity. 2 in the ignition lock.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
multifunction display, the tire pressure in ing wheel to select the Service menu.
one or more tires has dropped significantly X Press the 9 or : button to select
and the tires must be checked. Tire Pressure.
Pressure
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction X Press the a button.
appears in the multifunction display, the The multifunction display shows the cur-
tire pressure in one or more tires has drop- rent tire pressure for the individual tires or
ped suddenly and the tires must be the Tire pressure will be displayed
checked. after driving a few minutes mes-
Observe the instructions and safety notes in sage.
the display messages in the "Tires" section X Press the : button.
(Y page 236). The Use Current Pressures as New
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are Reference Values message appears in
rotated, the tire pressures may be dis- the multifunction display.
played for the wrong positions for a short If you wish to confirm the restart:
time. This is rectified after a few minutes of
driving, and the tire pressures are displayed
X Press the a button.

Wheels and tires

for the correct positions. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
After driving for a few minutes, the system
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all checks whether the current tire pressures
existing warning messages are deleted and are within the specified range. The new tire
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses pressures are then accepted as reference
the currently set tire pressures as the refer- values and monitored.
ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
If you wish to cancel the restart:
tire pressure monitor will automatically
detect the new reference values after you X Press the % button.
have changed the tire pressure. However, you The tire pressure values stored at the last
can also define reference values manually as restart will continue to be monitored.
described here. The tire pressure monitor
then monitors the new tire pressure values. Radio type approval for the tire pres-
X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- sure monitor
mended for the corresponding driving sit-
uation on the Tire and Loading Information Country Radio type approval number
placard on the driver's side
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
B-pillar (Y page 314).
FCC ID: MRXGG4
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
(Y page 314). IC: 2546A-GG4
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
on all four wheels.

Z
322 Loading the vehicle

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by : B-pillar, driver's side
exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show Maximum permissible gross vehicle
the maximum possible load. weight rating
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
Wheels and tires

of occupants and the maximum permis-

sible vehicle load. It also contains details
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres-
sures for tires installed at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can Information placard: "The combined weight
also find information about the maximum of occupants and cargo should never
gross axle weight rating on the front and exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
rear axle. The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
The maximum gross axle weight rating is load and luggage must not exceed the speci-
the maximum weight that can be carried fied value.
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the maxi- i The specifications shown on the Tire and
mum gross axle weight rating for the Loading Information placard in the illustra-
front or rear axle. tion are examples. The maximum permis-
sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ from that in the
illustration. You can find the valid maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight rating for
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard.
 Loading the vehicle 323

Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
Maximum number of seats : indicates the city calculated in step 4.
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information Example: steps 1 to 3
placard. The following table shows examples on how
i The specifications shown on the Tire and to calculate total and cargo load capacities
Loading Information placard in the illustra- with varying seating configurations and num-

Wheels and tires

tion are examples. The number of seats is ber and size of occupants. The following
vehicle-specific and can differ from the examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs
details shown. The number of seats in your (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load- only. Make sure you are using the actual load
ing Information placard. limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Y page 322).
Determining the correct load limit The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step-by-step instructions
Step 1
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Example 1 Example 2
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 Combined 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor maximum (680 kg) (680 kg)
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". weight of
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com- occupants
bined weight of occupants and cargo and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on (data from the
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information Tire and Load-
placard. ing Informa-
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of tion placard)
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.

Z
324 All about wheels and tires

Step 2 Permissible gross vehicle weight: the

gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers
Example 1 Example 2 and the load must not exceed the permissible
Number of 1 2 gross vehicle weight.
people in the Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-
vehicle (driver missible weight that can be carried by one
and occu- axle (front or rear axle).
pants) To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
Weight of the the maximum permissible values (gross vehi-
Occu- Occu-
occupants cle weight and maximum gross axle weight
pant 1: pant 1:
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including
175 lbs 175 lbs
driver, occupants and the load) weighed on a
(80 kg) (80 kg)
suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Occu-
pant 2:
195 lbs All about wheels and tires
(88 kg)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
Gross weight 175 lbs 370 lbs ards
of all occu- (80 kg) (168 kg)
Wheels and tires

pants Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-

ards
Step 3

Example 1 Example 2
Permissible 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
load (maxi- (680 kg) (680 kg)
mum gross Ò175 lbs Ò370 lbs
vehicle weight (80 kg) = (168 kg) =
rating from 1325 lbs 1130 lbs
the Tire and (600 kg) (512 kg)
Loading Infor-
mation plac-
ard minus the Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
gross weight U.S. government specifications. Their pur-
of all occu- pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-
pants) ble information on tire performance data. Tire
manufacturers have to grade tires using three
performance factors: treadwear grade :,
Vehicle identification plate traction grade ; and temperature grade =.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Even if you have calculated the total load Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
carefully, you should still make sure that the are provided with the corresponding quality
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
Where applicable, the tire grading informa-
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
tion can be found on the tire sidewall between
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
the tread shoulder and maximum tire width.
(Y page 322).
 All about wheels and tires 325

Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road con-
RTemperature grade: A
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
All passenger car tires must conform to the ing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 311). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Further information on winter tires (M+S
under controlled conditions on a specified tires) (Y page 312).
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Temperature
times as well on the government course as a

Wheels and tires

tire graded 100. G WARNING
The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
upon the actual conditions of their use, how- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ever, and may depart significantly from the not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
norm, due to variations in driving habits, ser- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
vice practices and differences in road char- in combination, can cause excessive heat
acteristics and climate conditions. build-up and possible tire failure.

Traction The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C. These represent the tire's resistance
G WARNING to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is sipate heat when tested under controlled
based on straight-ahead braking traction conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- cause the material of the tire to degenerate
acteristics. and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage C corresponds to a level of performance
to the drive train. which all passenger car tires must meet under
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as levels of performance on the laboratory test
measured under controlled conditions on wheel than the minimum required by law.
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.

Z
326 All about wheels and tires

Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.

: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard ? Rim diameter
Wheels and tires

(Y page 330) A Load bearing index

; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating
(Y page 329) General: depending on the manufacturer's
= Maximum tire load (Y page 328) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 316) may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 329) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- tion (as shown above): these are passenger
city and speed index (Y page 326) vehicle tires according to European manufac-
D Load index (Y page 328) turing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales designa-
tion) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. manu-
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- facturing standards.
ate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- tire width in millimeters.
city and the approved maximum speed could Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There size ratio between the tire height and tire
is a risk of accident. width and is shown in percent. The aspect
 All about wheels and tires 327

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by Sum-

the tire height. mer
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. tires
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial Index Speed rating
tires. Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
the size description, depending on the man- S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam- T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in). V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi-
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-

Wheels and tires

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
the driver's side (Y page 322).
Example:
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can the size description, depending on the
bear. For further information on the maximum manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
The service specification is made up of
(Y page 328).
load-bearing index A and speed rating B.
For further information on the load bearing
RIf the size description of your tire includes
index, see "Load index" (Y page 328).
"ZR" and there are no service specifica-
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
approved maximum speed of the tire. find out the maximum speed.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- If a service specification is available, the
ate from the data in the example. maximum speed is limited according to the
Regardless of the speed rating, always speed rating in the service specification.
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
tions. letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-
ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating

Z
328 All about wheels and tires

"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of Further information about reading tire data
the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask can be obtained from any qualified specialist
the tire manufacturer about the maximum workshop.
speed.
Load index
All-
weather
tires
and win-
ter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S3 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S3 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S3 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S3 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) In addition to the load bearing index, load rat-
ing : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
Wheels and tires

(Y page 326).
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on example above), represents a standard
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill load (SL) tire
the requirements of the Rubber Manufac- RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber tire

Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the RLight Load: represents a light load tire
tire traction on snow. They have been espe- RC, D, E: represents a load range that
cially developed for driving on snow. depends on the maximum load that the tire
An electronic speed limiter prevents your can carry at a certain pressure
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ate from the data in the example.
130 mph (210 km/h)
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) Maximum load rating
RAMG vehicles with Handling Package:
174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "tires" section (Y page 337).

3 Or M+Si for winter tires.

 All about wheels and tires 329

Maximum load rating : is the maximum per- For further information about retreaded tires,
missible weight for which the tire is approved. see (Y page 310).
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
specified load limit. The maximum permissi- Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and by the manufacturer as a code to describe
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on specific characteristics of the tire.
the driver's side (Y page 322).
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- A provides information about the age of a
specific and may deviate from the values in tire. The first and second positions represent
the illustration. the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN 2008.
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

Wheels and tires

The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or
retreaders to notify customers of recalls or
other safety-related matters. It makes it pos-
sible for the purchaser to easily identify the This information describes the type of tire
affected tires. cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
The TIN consists of the manufacturer identi- and under tire tread ;.
fication code ;, tire size =, tire type
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
code ? and manufacturing date A.
ate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies Definition of terms for tires and loading
with the requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation. Tire ply composition and material used
Manufacturer identification code: manu- Describes the number of plies or the number
facturer identification code ; provides of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded nylon, polyester and other materials.
tires have a code with four symbols.

Z
330 All about wheels and tires

Bar GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals weight. The actual load on an axle must never
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
DOT (Department of Transportation) vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the driver's side.
the United States Department of Transporta-
tion. Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
Normal occupant weight tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
The number of occupants which the vehicle is tire is approved.
designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lb). GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
A uniform standard to grade the quality of wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as
Wheels and tires

government testing procedures. The ratings specified on the vehicle identification plate on
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. the B pillar on the driver's side.
Recommended tire pressure GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The recommended tire pressure applies to The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
the tires mounted at the factory. weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
tains the recommended tire pressures for pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
maximum permissible vehicle speed. weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-
The tire pressure table contains the recom- tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
mended pressures for cold tires for various side.
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and Maximum loaded vehicle weight
speed conditions.
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Increased vehicle weight due to optional Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
equipment
Rthe weight of the accessories
This is the combined weight of all standard
Rthe load limit
and optional equipment available for the vehi-
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal-
led on the vehicle or not. equipment

Rim Kilopascal (kPa)

This is the part of the wheel on which the tire Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
is mounted. sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
1 bar.
 All about wheels and tires 331

Load index Cold tire pressure

In addition to the load-bearing index, the load The tires are cold:
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of Rif the vehicle has been parked without
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa- direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
city more precisely. hours and
Curb weight Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than

The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- 1 mile (1.6 km).

ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, Tread
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
The part of the tire that comes into contact
tioning system and optional equipment if
with the road.
these are installed in the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage. Bead
Maximum load rating The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
The maximum tire load is the maximum per-
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a
coming loose from the wheel rim.
tire is approved.
Sidewall
Maximum permissible tire pressure
The part of the tire between the tread and the

Wheels and tires

Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
bead.
tire.
Weight of optional extras
Maximum load on one tire
The combined weight of those optional extras
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
that weigh more than the replaced standard
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
by two.
These optional extras, such as high-perform-
PSI (pounds per square inch) ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. high-performance battery, are not included in
the curb weight and the weight of the acces-
Aspect ratio sories.
Relationship between tire height and tire
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
width in percent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used
Tire pressure by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
This is pressure inside the tire applying an example for a product recall, and thus identify
outward force to each square inch of the tire's the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
surface. The tire pressure is specified in manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal type code and the manufacturing date.
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
Load bearing index
be corrected when the tires are cold.
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.

Z
332 Changing a wheel

Traction Tire-mounting tools should not be used

Traction is the result of friction between the near the valve. This could damage the elec-
tires and the road surface. tronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
Treadwear indicators cialist workshop.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-
Always pay attention to the instructions and
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is
safety notes when changing a wheel
level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(Y page 333).
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Occupant distribution differ, depending on the operating conditions.
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
their designated seating positions. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
Total load limit in the center.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num- can rotate the wheels according to the inter-
ber of seats in the vehicle. vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
book is available, the tires should be rotated
Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to

Flat tire 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
not change the direction of wheel rotation.
The "Breakdown assistance" section Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
(Y page 292) contains information and notes the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of essary, restart the tire pressure loss warning
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended system or the tire pressure monitor.
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
(Y page 293).
Direction of rotation
Rotating the wheels Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
G WARNING of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may efits if the correct direction of rotation is
severely impair the driving characteristics if maintained.
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
The wheel brakes or suspension components its correct direction of rotation.
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Storing wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
monitor, electronic components are loca- tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
ted in the wheel.
 Changing a wheel 333

Cleaning the wheels i Due to differences in vehicle equipment,

not all vehicles are equipped with a tire-
G WARNING change tool kit. For information on which
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt tools are required to perform a wheel
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage change on your vehicle, consult an author-
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- Necessary wheel-changing tools can
edly. There is a risk of an accident. include, for example:
Do not use power washers with circular jet RJack
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
RWheel chock
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately. RLug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

Mounting a wheel rolling away

Preparing the vehicle

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.

Wheels and tires

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
fully depress the clutch pedal and engage
first or reverse gear.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
move the selector lever to P. it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
X Switch off the engine. (Y page 292).
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove The folding wheel chock is an additional
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the rolling away, for example when changing a
driver's door. wheel.
The on-board electronics now have status X Fold both plates upwards :.
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having X Fold out lower plate ;.
been removed. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the the openings in base plate =.
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 140).
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.

Z
334 Changing a wheel

The following must be observed when raising

the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
Securing the vehicle on level ground forming maintenance work under the vehi-
cle.
X On level ground: place chocks or other
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the downhill slopes.
wheel you wish to change. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
Wheels and tires

Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
X On light downhill gradients: place
height.
chocks or other suitable items in front of
Rmake sure that the distance between the
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
Raising the vehicle
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
G WARNING raised vehicle.
If you do not position the jack correctly at the Rdo not lie under the vehicle.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. raised.
There is a risk of injury. Rdo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- when the vehicle is raised.
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Rmake sure that no persons are present in
must be positioned vertically, directly under the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-

ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
 Changing a wheel 335

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG

equipment: fold cover ; upwards.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
X Position jack ? at jacking point =.

Wheels and tires

Example
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
rear wheel housings (arrows). beneath the jacking point.
X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits
completely on jacking point = and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn crank A until the tire is raised a max-
imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equip- you screw them in.
ment)
AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the
vehicle has covers next to the jacking points
on the outer sills.

Z
336 Changing a wheel

approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the

respective wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
Mounting a new wheel X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
Wheels and tires

alignment bolt and push it on.

G WARNING
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
ger-tight.
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
accident. tight.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
damage to the threads, contact a qualified inflate the collapsible spare wheel
specialist workshop immediately. Have the (Y page 342). Only then lower the vehicle.
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip and bolts are not tightened to the specified
over. There is a risk of injury. tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts Have the tightening torque immediately
when the vehicle is on the ground. checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-
tion (Y page 332).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
 Wheel and tire combinations 337

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock- or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
wise until the vehicle is once again standing RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
firmly on the ground. RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
X Place the jack to one side. (tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (: tain AMG tires)
to A). The specified tightening torque is Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
96 lb-ft (130 Nm). may only be used on wheels that have been

Wheels and tires

X Turn the jack back to its initial position. specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-
tools in the trunk again. ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
equipment: insert the cover into the outer noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
sill. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-
X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
sion variations could cause the tires to
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
come into contact with the bodywork and
Observe the recommended tire pressure axle components. This could result in dam-
(Y page 314). age to the tires or the vehicle.
i When you are driving with the collapsible Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure damage resulting from the use of tires,
loss warning system or the tire pressure wheels or accessories other than those tes-
monitor cannot function reliably. Only ted and approved.
restart the tire pressure loss warning sys- Information on tires, wheels and approved
tem/the tire pressure monitor when the combinations can be obtained from any
damaged wheel has been replaced with a qualified specialist workshop.
new wheel.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
Vehicles with a tire pressure control ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre-
system: all installed wheels must be equip- vious damage cannot always be detected
ped with functioning sensors. on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-
Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if
retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount
used tires if you have no information about
their previous usage.

Z
338 Wheel and tire combinations

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- Winter tires are not available at the factory
ing tire tables: as standard equipment or optional extras.
RBA: both axles If you want to equip your vehicle with
RFA: front axle approved winter tires, it may be necessary
to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding
RRA: rear axle
size. The size of the approved winter tires
The recommended pressures for various may differ from the standard tires. This is
operating conditions can be found: dependent on the model and the equip-
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard ment installed at the factory.
with the recommended tire pressures on The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
the B-pillar on the driver's side information, can be obtained at a qualified
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the specialist workshop.
fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 314).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
Wheels and tires

turer in the vehicle document wallet.

Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-
mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 293).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addi-
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
i The following pages contain information
on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicle with winter tires.
 Wheel and tire combinations 339

Tires
SLK 250
Summer tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
RA: 245/40 R17 91 W4, 5 RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Wheels and tires

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL5 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

Winter tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

SLK 350
Summer tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
RA: 245/40 R17 91 W4, 5 RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

4 Available as MOExtended tires.

5 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Z
340 Wheel and tire combinations

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)
RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL5 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

Winter tires
R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

SLK 55 AMG
Summer tires
Wheels and tires

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)
RA: 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL5 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Winter tires
R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+S i BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)
FA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)
HA: 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si5 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

5 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
4 Available as MOExtended tires.
 Emergency spare wheel 341

Emergency spare wheel Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
Important safety notes emergency spare wheel.
G WARNING i When you are driving with the collapsible
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel loss warning system or the tire pressure
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. monitor cannot function reliably. Only
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may restart the tire pressure loss warning sys-
severely impair the driving characteristics. tem/the tire pressure monitor when the
There is a risk of an accident. damaged wheel has been replaced with a
To avoid hazardous situations: new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
drive carefully.
the system may still display the tire pres-
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
sure of the removed wheel for a few
emergency spare wheel that differs in size. minutes. The value displayed for the moun-
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare ted emergency spare wheel is not the same
wheel of a different size briefly. as the current tire pressure of the emer-
Rdo not switch ESP® off. gency spare wheel.

Wheels and tires

Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop. Removing the emergency spare wheel
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.

General notes (Example)

You should regularly check the pressure of The collapsible spare wheel can be found in
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior the stowage well under the trunk floor.
to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec- X Lift and remove the reversible floor panel in
essary (Y page 314). The applicable value is the trunk (Y page 258).
found on the wheel or under "Technical data" X Turn retaining screw ; counter-clockwise
(Y page 344). and remove it.
An emergency spare wheel may also be X Remove collapsible spare wheel :.
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as Always observe the instructions and safety
the speed limitation specified on the emer- notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
gency spare wheel. (Y page 333).

Z
342 Emergency spare wheel

Stowing the emergency spare wheel

! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, mois-
ture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used col-
lapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collaps-
ible spare wheel will not fit in the trunk in the
intended manner. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you have this work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as
described (Y page 333).
X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from
the valve and release the air. The collapsible spare wheel must be moun-
ted before it is inflated.
i Fully deflating the tires can take a few
X Pull plug ? out of the housing.
minutes.
X Take the air hose out of the housing.
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X Insert the yellow hose connector of the air
X Screw the valve cap back on.
hose into the guide in the housing and push
Wheels and tires

X Pull the protective sheet provided with the it into the fixture until the hose connector
spare wheel over the collapsible spare engages.
wheel. X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the lapsible spare wheel.
emergency spare wheel well under the X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the
trunk.
valve.
X Use the retaining screw to pierce the pro-
X Make sure the tire inflation compressor's
tective sheet and fasten the collapsible
on/off switch A is set to OFF.
spare wheel in place.
X Insert plug ? into the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in
your vehicle.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using (Y page 260). Observe the notes on sock-
the tire inflation compressor before lower- ets (Y page 261).
ing the vehicle. The wheel rim could other- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
wise be damaged. tion lock (Y page 139).
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres- X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
sor for longer than ten minutes at a time compressor to ON.
without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor is switched
The tire inflation compressor can be oper- on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
ated again once it has cooled down. shown on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pres-
sure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
 Emergency spare wheel 343

X When the specified tire pressure has been

reached, press on/off switch A to OFF, on
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the speci-
fied pressure, press pressure release but-
ton ; until the correct tire pressure has
been reached.
X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from
the valve.
X Screw the cap onto the valve of the col-
lapsible spare wheel again.

Wheels and tires

Removing an air hose
X To remove the hose from the tire inflation
compressor, push down the rocker switch
on the hose connector and pull out the
hose.
X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
section of the blower housing.
X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the
vehicle.

Z
344 Emergency spare wheel

Technical data
All models

Collapsible spare wheel6

Tires Alloy wheels
145/70-17 92 P 4.5 B x 17 H2
Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) Wheel offset: 0.47 in (12 mm)

Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels mounted, your vehicle may be equipped
with TIREFIT or a collapsible spare wheel.
i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.
Wheels and tires

6 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.
 345

Useful information ............................ 346

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 346
Identification plates ......................... 346
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 347
Vehicle data ...................................... 353

Technical data
346 Identification plates

Useful information

i This Operator's manual describes all

models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's manual.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
i Read the information on qualified special- ; VIN
ist workshops (Y page 26). = Vehicle model

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Technical data

Identification plates Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- ; VIN
cle identification number (VIN) = Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.

X Open the driver's door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.
 Service products and filling capacities 347

VIN Service products and filling capaci-

ties
Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
X Slide the front-passenger seat to its front of the reach of children.
most position.
X Fold trim : upwards. H Environmental note
VIN ; can be seen. Dispose of service products in an environ-
The VIN can also be found in the following mentally responsible manner.
locations:
Service products include the following:
Ron the vehicle identification plate
RFuels
(Y page 346)
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 347) RCoolant

Technical data
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
Engine number RClimate control system refrigerant
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
fluids.
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use prod-
ucts that have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved prod-
ucts can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
: Emission control information plate, http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
including the certification of both federal You can recognize service products approved
and Californian emissions standards by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- tion on the containers:
case) RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.

Z
348 Service products and filling capacities

MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been Model Of which

approved by Mercedes-Benz. reserve
All models Approx.
Fuel 2.4 US gal
(9.0 l)
Important safety notes
G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
Fuel grade
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
refueling.
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
G WARNING
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. tank and fuel lines drained completely.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come ! Only refuel using unleaded premium
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel 95 RON.
Technical data

vapors. Keep fuel away from children. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
If you or others come into contact with fuel, ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
observe the following: engine failure.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately ! Do not use the following:
using soap and water.
RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
RE100 (100% ethanol)
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay. RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- RM100 (100% methanol)
ing. RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RImmediately change out of clothing which RDiesel
has come into contact with fuel.
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-
Tank capacity tives. This can otherwise lead to engine
damage. This does not include cleaning
Model Total capa- additives for the removal and prevention of
city residue build-up. gasoline may only be
All models 18.5 US gal mixed with cleaning additives recommen-
(70.0 l) ded by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives".
You can obtain further information from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
 Service products and filling capacities 349

! To ensure the longevity and full perform- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
ance of the engine, only premium-grade branded fuels that have additives.
unleaded gasoline must be used. The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- tries may not be sufficient. Residue could
ble and you have to refuel with unleaded build up in the injection system as a result. In
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- such cases, and in consultation with an
lowing precautions: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- line may be mixed with the cleaning additive
ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
as soon as possible. on the container.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine Engine oil
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
General notes
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gas- ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
oline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used. specification other than is necessary to ful-
You will usually find information about the fuel fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the change the engine oil or oil filter in order to
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- achieve longer replacement intervals than
tance. those prescribed. You could otherwise
cause engine damage or damage to the
i For further information, consult a quali-

Technical data
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
fied specialist workshop or visit
Follow the instructions in the service inter-
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
val display regarding the oil change. Other-
As a temporary measure, if the recommended wise, you may damage the engine and the
fuel is not available, you may also use unlea- exhaust gas aftertreatment.
ded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/
When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
91 RON. This may reduce engine perform-
tant safety notes on service products
ance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid
(Y page 347).
driving at full throttle and sudden accelera-
tion. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. The engine oils are matched to the perform-
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
Information on refueling (Y page 158).
intervals. You should therefore only use
Additives in gasoline engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
! Operating the engine with fuel additives vehicles with maintenance systems.
added later can lead to engine failure. Do For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
not include additives for the removal and ter. Or visit the website
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
must only be mixed with additives recom- The table shows which engine oils have been
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with approved for your vehicle.
the instructions for use on the product
label. More information about recommen-
ded additives can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z
350 Service products and filling capacities

Model Engine MB this means that it is thick; a low viscosity

model Approval means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
SLK 250 271 229.5 (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
SLK 350 276 229.5 temperatures. The table shows you which
SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
SLK 55 AMG 152 229.5 temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
for AMG vehicles. strongly recommended that you carry out reg-
ular oil changes using an approved engine oil
i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- with the appropriate SAE classification.
tainers.

Filling capacities Brake fluid

The following values refer to an oil change G WARNING
including the oil filter.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
Model Capacity from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
SLK 250 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
SLK 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
SLK 55 AMG With external oil
Technical data

There is a risk of an accident.

cooler: 10.0 US qt You should have the brake fluid renewed at
(9.5 l) the specified intervals.

Additives When handling brake fluid, observe the

important safety notes on service products
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. (Y page 347).
This could damage the engine.
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Engine oil viscosity
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
shop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics

of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
 Service products and filling capacities 351

Coolant ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡

(130 †).
Important safety notes The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
G WARNING tion in the engine cooling system should:
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
ponents in the engine compartment, it may cooling system against freezing down to
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Let the engine cool down before you add anti- Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the will not be dissipated as effectively.
antifreeze from components before starting If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
the engine. amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
with the desired antifreeze protection. You corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-
could otherwise damage the engine. ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-
Further information on coolants can be ucts 310.1.
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
on the Internet at led with a coolant mixture that ensures
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
tact a qualified specialist workshop. tion.

Technical data
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, i The coolant is checked with every main-
even in countries where high temperatures tenance interval at a qualified specialist
prevail. workshop.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
Filling capacities
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating. Missing values were not available at time of
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a going to print.
qualified specialist workshop and the Model Capacity
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet. SLK 250 Approx. 10.1 US qt
Comply with the important safety precautions (9.6 l)
for service products when handling coolant SLK 350 Approx. 11.0 US qt
(Y page 347). (10.4 l)
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
SLK 55 AMG
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks:
Rcorrosion
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 approved
protection
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor.
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-

Z
352 Service products and filling capacities

Windshield washer system Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-
ature.
Important safety notes
RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win-
G WARNING terFit to 2 parts water.
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win-
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- terFit to 1 part water.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
fire and injury. WinterFit to 1 part water.
Make sure that no windshield washer con- i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid Climate control system refrigerant
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps. Important safety notes
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to The climate control system of your vehicle is
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
level sensor may be damaged. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit type used can be found on the radiator cross
washer fluid should be mixed together. The member.
spray nozzles may otherwise become
Technical data

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG

blocked. oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
When handling washer fluid, observe the used. The approved PAG oil may not be
important safety notes on service products mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
(Y page 347). approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
At temperatures above freezing: wise, the climate control system may be
damaged.
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant
MB SummerFit. or replacing components, may only be carried
X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
water.
SAE standard J639 included.
At temperatures below freezing: Always have work on the climate control sys-
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter- shop.
Fit.
 Vehicle data 353

Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Example: refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
: Warning symbol payload.
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number Dimensions and weights
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop

Technical data
Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant
AMG vehicles 22.2 ± 0.4 oz
(630 ± 10 g) Model : Opening height

All other models 19.4 ± 0.4 oz All models (70.7 in)

(550 ± 10 g) (1796 mm)

Missing values were not available at time of

Model PAG oil
going to print.
AMG vehicles 2.8 oz
AMG vehicles
(80 g)
Vehicle length 163.2 in (4146 mm)
All other models 4.2 oz
(120 g) Vehicle length
when opening/
closing the roof
Vehicle width 79.0 in (2006 mm)
including exterior
mirrors

Z
354 Vehicle data

AMG vehicles
Vehicle height 51.2 in (1301 mm)
Vehicle height,
when opening/
closing the roof
Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)
Turning radius 34.6 ft (10.55 m)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load

All other models

Vehicle length 162.8 in (4134 mm)
Vehicle length 170.2 in (4323 mm)
when opening/
closing the roof
Vehicle width 79.0 in (2006 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Technical data

Vehicle height 51.3 in (1303 mm)

Vehicle height, 61.5 in (1561 mm)
when opening/
closing the roof
Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)
Turning radius 34.5 ft (10.52 m)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
355
356